GHSA Constitution and By-Laws for 2014-2015

The GHSA Constitution and By-Laws for 2014-2015 (White Book) is now available.

Please click on the links below in order to download/view the GHSA Constitution and By-Laws:

GHSA Constitution and By-Laws 2014-2015

Results and Records of State Playoff Events 2013-2014

Constitutions from prior years (from 1909) are also available. Click on the links below for the GHSA historical archive.

GHSA Constitutions from Prior Years

GHSA Results and Records from Prior Years

 


 

Table of Contents

 

  1. Constitution
  2. By-Law Section 1.00 - Student
  3. By-Law 1.10 - Certification of Eligibility
  4. By-Law 1.20 - Enrollment and Team Membership
  5. By-Law 1.30 - Age
  6. By-Law 1.40 - Limits of Participation
  7. By-Law 1.50 - Scholastic Standing / Scholarship
  8. By-Law 1.60 - School Service Areas / Transfer / Migrant Students
  9. By-Law 1.70 - Recruting / Undue Influence
  10. By-Law 1.80 - Financial Aid
  11. By-Law 1.90 - Amateur Status / Awards
  12. Interpretations - By-Law 1.00 Section
  13. By-Law Section 2.00 - School
  14. By-Law 2.10 - School Membership to GHSA
  15. By-Law 2.20 - Administrative Responsibilities
  16. By-Law 2.30 - Eligibility Reports Filed by the School
  17. By-Law 2.40 - Student Retention for Athletic Activities
  18. By-Law 2.50 - Qualifications to Coach
  19. By-Law 2.60 - Interscholastic Contests and Practices
  20. By-Law 2.70 Sportsmanship
  21. By-Law 2.80 Media and Filming Regulations
  22. By-Law 2.90 Regulations of Competitions
  23. Interpretations - By-Law 2.00 Section
  24. By-Law Section 3.00 - Region
  25. By-Law 3.10 - Region Authority
  26. By-Law 3.20 - Region Responsibilities to State Association
  27. By-Law 3.30 - Region Financial Obligations to State Association
  28. By-Law Section 4.00 - State
  29. By-Law 4.10 - GHSA Administrative Responsibility to Member Schools
  30. By-Law 4.20 - Reclassification Schedule
  31. By-Law 4.30 - State Association Contest / Event Responsibilties
  32. By-Law 4.40 - State Passes in GHSA Events
  33. By-Law 4.50 - Certification of Athletic Officials
  34. By-Law 4.60 - Special GHSA Policies
  35. Interpretations - By-Law 4.00 Section
  36. Athletics and Activities
  37. Baseball
  38. Basketball
  39. Cheerleading
  40. Cross Country
  41. Football
  42. Golf
  43. Gymnastics
  44. Lacrosse
  45. Riflery
  46. Soccer
  47. Softball
  48. Swimming and Diving
  49. Tennis
  50. Track and Field
  51. Volleyball
  52. Wrestling
  53. Literary
  54. One Act Play

CONSTITUTION

(2014-15)

ARTICLE I - NAME OF THE ORGANIZATION


This organization shall be known as the Georgia High School Association.

 

ARTICLE II - OBJECT OF THE ORGANIZATION

The objective of the organization shall be the promotion of education in Georgia from a mental, physical, and moral viewpoint, to standardize and encourage participation in athletics, to promote sportsmanship and an appreciation for and study of music, speech, and other fine arts through Region and State competitions.

 

ARTICLE III  —  MEMBERSHIP

SECTION 1
SCHOOLS ELIGIBLE FOR MEMBERSHIP


The membership of the Georgia High School Association shall consist of public and private high schools in the state of Georgia.

 

SECTION 2
CLASSIFICATION OF SCHOOLS
 
A. The Reclassification Committee of the GHSA Executive Committee shall place member schools in classifications and regions based on student F.T.E. figures and geographic proximity, respectively.
 
B. Member schools will be realigned every two years.
 
C. The number of classifications and the number of regions will be determined by the Reclassification Committee at the time of each realignment.
 
D. The realignment plan of the Reclassification Committee shall be ratified by a simple majority vote of the full Executive Committee.
 
 
SECTION 3
STRUCTURE OF REGIONS
 
A. After reclassification, all regions will meet and submit to the State Office, after the final reclassification vote, a plan for structure of the regions.  These plans must spell out subdivisions, if any, for all activities.  All regions must have been approved before any scheduling may be finalized.
 
B. In the event that any member school has a complaint with the structure of a region, it shall so advise the Executive Director and all other schools in the subject region of such complaint in writing within five (5) days after the region meeting following the final reclassification vote.  The Executive Director shall then convene a meeting of the Reclassification Committee to review the present and proposed region structure and to attempt to arbitrate the differences and, failing that, to make a recommendation to the Executive Committee.
 
All schools in the subject region shall be advised of the meeting of the Reclassification Committee by the Executive Director and shall have the right to present evidence to the Committee.  Any member of the Committee which is a member of the subject region shall be disqualified from participation on the Committee.
CONSTITUTION

ARTICLE I - NAME OF THE ORGANIZATION


This organization shall be known as the Georgia High School Association.

 

ARTICLE II - OBJECT OF THE ORGANIZATION

The objective of the organization shall be the promotion of education in Georgia from a mental, physical, and moral viewpoint, to standardize and encourage participation in athletics, to promote sportsmanship and an appreciation for and study of music, speech, and other fine arts through Region and State competitions.

 

ARTICLE III  —  MEMBERSHIP

SECTION 1
SCHOOLS ELIGIBLE FOR MEMBERSHIP


The membership of the Georgia High School Association shall consist of public and private high schools in the state of Georgia.

 

SECTION 2
CLASSIFICATION OF SCHOOLS
 
A. The Reclassification Committee of the GHSA Executive Committee shall place member schools in classifications and regions based on student F.T.E. figures and geographic proximity, respectively.
 
B. Member schools will be realigned every two years.
 
C. The number of classifications and the number of regions will be determined by the Reclassification Committee at the time of each realignment.
 
D. The realignment plan of the Reclassification Committee shall be ratified by a simple majority vote of the full Executive Committee.
 
 
SECTION 3
STRUCTURE OF REGIONS
 
A. After reclassification, all regions will meet and submit to the State Office, after the final reclassification vote, a plan for structure of the regions.  These plans must spell out subdivisions, if any, for all activities.  All regions must have been approved before any scheduling may be finalized.
 
B. In the event that any member school has a complaint with the structure of a region, it shall so advise the Executive Director and all other schools in the subject region of such complaint in writing within five (5) days after the region meeting following the final reclassification vote.  The Executive Director shall then convene a meeting of the Reclassification Committee to review the present and proposed region structure and to attempt to arbitrate the differences and, failing that, to make a recommendation to the Executive Committee.
 
All schools in the subject region shall be advised of the meeting of the Reclassification Committee by the Executive Director and shall have the right to present evidence to the Committee.  Any member of the Committee which is a member of the subject region shall be disqualified from participation on the Committee.
 
C. The Executive Committee shall have full authority to require all or any portion of a subregion to play cross-over games and to align or realign the subject region into new subregions.
 
SECTION 4
MEMBERSHIP IN ANOTHER ASSOCIATION
 
A school is not eligible for membership in the Georgia High School Association if it is or becomes a member of an association whose Constitution and/or By-Laws are in conflict with the Constitution and/or By-Laws of the Georgia High School Association.

 

ARTICLE IV - GOVERNANCE

SECTION 1
STATE OFFICERS


The State Officers of this Association shall consist of a President, a Vice President, and an Executive Director.

 

SECTION 2
STATE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
 
A. Membership of the State Executive Committee shall be composed of the State Officers, the State Superintendent of Schools or his/her representative, and one member elected from each region in each classification, plus one member each appointed by the Georgia School Boards Association, the Georgia School Superintendents' Association, the Georgia Association of Secondary School Principals, the Georgia Athletic Directors Association, and the Executive Secretary of the Georgia Athletic Coaches Association.  Membership shall also include two female members appointed by the Executive Committee upon recommendation of the Board of Trustees from nominees submitted by each region.  Each member shall have the right to vote on all matters pertaining to the operation of the Association.
   
B. Terms of office for members of the State Executive Committee elected by regions shall coincide with the length of each reclassification cycle.
 
C. When a member of the State Executive Committee is unable to attend a State Executive Committee meeting, the President of the region shall have power to appoint an eligible member of the region concerned to represent the region at that meeting.
 
 
SECTION 3
BOARD OF TRUSTEES
 
A. Membership of the Board of Trustees shall be composed of the President, Vice President, and Executive Director, plus one member from each classification and one at-large member elected by the Executive Committee. The term of office for members of the Executive Committee serving on the Board of Trustees shall be for two (2) years.
 
B. The Board of Trustees shall receive and hold title to all real and personal property of said Association in trust for the benefit of said Association and shall have general custody and administration of such property with power and authority to lease, sell and convey said property of said Association; provided however, said Board of Trustees shall not sell or convey any real property so held by them in trust for said Association without first being authorized to do so by a majority vote of the State Executive Committee of said Association at a meeting duly called for such purpose.
 
C. The Board of Trustees reviews pertinent issues relative to the successful operation of the organization.  The Board of Trustees reviews the recommendation by the Executive Director concerning the budget, recommends committee appointments, and recommends length of contract for the Executive Director.  The Board of Trustees recommends the two at-large female representatives to the Executive Committee.
 
                                           
SECTION 4
STATE APPEAL BOARD
 
A. The State Appeal Board shall be composed of members selected from the full State Executive Committee on a rotating basis.
B. The duties of the State Appeal Board as set forth in Sec. 9 shall be performed by four (4) members of the Board sitting on an alternating basis as selected and notified by the Executive Director.
 
C. Eligibility appeals in regard to the eight-semester rule may be referred by the Executive Director to the State Executive Committee for a final ruling.
 
D. There shall be no appeal of eligibility related to age restrictions set forth in the by-laws.
 

SECTION 5
HARDSHIP COMMITTEE
 
A. 1. The Hardship Committee shall be composed of members selected from the full State Executive Committee on a rotating basis.
 
2. The duties of the Hardship Committee shall be performed by four (4) members of the Executive Committee sitting on an alternating basis as selected and notified by the Executive Director.
 
B. The Hardship Committee shall have the authority to set aside the effect of the migratory rule, the courses passed rule, and the accumulation of credits rule upon an individual student when in its opinion the rule works an undue hardship upon that student.  The Hardship Committee does not hear cases regarding normal semesters, four years of participation, or appeals arising under the By-Laws.
 
1. The Hardship Committee shall meet at a location and on dates established by the Executive Director and published in the GHSA Calendar.  Requests will be considered to have a rule or rules set aside for benefit of individual students and shall consider such requests at the meetings held for that purpose, but not at any other meetings of the committee. If conditions upon which a request is based develop after April 1, the Executive Director is authorized to set a date for a special meeting to be held at the State Office to consider such case or cases.
 
2. The principals of all member schools who have filed requests to have the effect of a rule set aside for individual students shall be notified of the time of the meeting at which such requests will be considered not less than five working days before such meeting.
 
3. A request will be considered at a meeting only if complete information concerning the case is filed in writing with the Executive Director at least ten days prior to the date of the meeting and if a representative of the school, along with the student, is present at the meeting to furnish the Hardship Committee with information. Complete information includes a transcript.
 
4. The conditions which cause the student to fail to meet the eligibility requirements must have been beyond the control of the school, the student, and/or his parents, and such that none of them could reasonably have been expected to comply with the rule. Ignorance of the rule on the part of any or all of them shall not be considered sufficient cause for setting aside its effects.
 
5. The decision of the Hardship Committee shall be decided by a majority vote to set aside the effects of the rule in each individual case, and such decision shall not be considered as setting a precedent for other cases of a somewhat similar nature.
 
6. The decision of the Hardship Committee shall be appealable to the Appeals Board by compliance with Sec. 9C. of the Constitution and then to the State Executive Committee by compliance with Sec. 9F. of the Constitution.
 
C. 1. The Executive Director shall have the authority upon receiving an application by a member school to set aside the effect of any eligibility rule upon an individual student within the jurisdiction of the Hardship Committee and to grant the same without necessity of the appearance of the student or a representative of the school before the Hardship Committee when, in the judgement of the Executive Director, the circumstances regarding the application are such that:
 (a) The conditions which cause the student to fail to meet the eligibility requirements are beyond the control of the school, the student, and/or his parents and such that none of them could reasonably have been expected to comply with the rule; and,
 (b) The conditions which cause the student to fail to meet the eligibility requirements work an unjust, unfair, and unforeseeable hardship upon the student; and
 (c) The facts are clear, undisputed, and supported by appropriate documentation.
 
2. The Executive Director shall not have the authority to deny an application for hardship status and shall be required to either grant the application or to schedule the application for hearing by the Hardship Committee.
 
D. 1. The Executive Director shall have the discretion upon receiving an application by a member school to set aside the effect of any academic eligibility or eight semester rule upon individual students when, in the judgement of the Executive Director, the following criteria are met:
(a) The conditions which cause the student to fail to meet the eligibility requirements are beyond the control of the school, the student and his parents, and such that none of them could reasonably have been expected to comply with the rule; and
(b) The conditions which cause the student to fail to meet the eligibility requirements work an unjust, unfair and unforeseeable hardship upon the student; and
(c) The facts are clear, undisputed and supported by appropriate documentation and evidence; and
(d) The setting aside of the subject rule would not result in an unfair advantage to the school or student nor compromise the safety of any other student.
 
2. The decision of the Executive Director shall be appealable under the provisions of Section 9 of the GHSA Constitution and By-Laws.
 
 
SECTION 6
REGION OFFICERS
 
A. Each Region of each Classification shall elect a President, a Vice President, a Secretary-Treasurer, and from one to three committee members.  No two of the above shall be from the same school unless the two are President and the Secretary-Treasurer.  These officers, together with any member of the State Executive Committee from the region, shall compose the Executive Committee in their region.
 
B.  A member of the State Executive Committee who is not an elected member of his Region Executive Committee shall be an added member of his respective Region Executive Committee.  This provision that only one (1) member of the Region Executive Committee may come from the same school will apply only to the members elected by the region, and will not apply when the State Executive Committee member in the region is from the same school as an elected member.
 
C. The treasurer of each region is required to make an itemized statement of the income and expenditures of all funds to the region.  When a new treasurer is elected, any balance must be turned over to the new officer immediately.
 
 
SECTION 7
DUTIES OF OFFICERS
 
The duties of the various officers and committees shall be those usually devolving upon such officers and committees.  It is specifically the duty of the State Executive Committee and the Region Executive Committees to seek at all times to educate the school officials under their jurisdiction, and at the same time, to check vigorously any practice or violation of the rules by exercising the full penalty for such violations if it is deemed necessary.

 

SECTION 8
ELECTION OF OFFICERS
 
A. A President and a Vice President shall be elected as State Association officers at the spring meeting of the Georgia High School Association.
 
B. The election and term of office of the Executive Director shall be for a term of one to five years at the discretion of the State Executive Committee and the President and Vice President of the Georgia High School  Association and shall be authorized to execute a contract in the name of and for the Georgia High School Association.
 
C. Only members of the State Executive Committee shall be entitled to vote in elections.
 
D. Should the President become disqualified by death, resignation, or otherwise, the Vice President shall assume the office immediately and shall act as President until the vacancy is filled.
 
E. Any vacancy which may occur in the office of President or Vice President shall be filled at the next meeting of the State Executive Committee.
 
F.  Each region in each Classification shall elect at any region meeting, a President, a Vice President, a Secretary-Treasurer, and from one to three region committee members as region officers.
 
Terms of office shall be for two (2) years, and elections shall be held at the beginning of each reclassification cycle.  Any vacancy occurring on a Region Committee shall be filled by the Region Committee until the next meeting of the region.
 
G. The State Executive Committee member from each region shall be elected at any Region meeting when there is a vacancy to be filled.  The term of office shall be for a period of two (2) years.  Any vacancy occurring on the State Executive Committee shall be filled by the Region Committee until the next meeting of the region concerned.
 
 
SECTION 9
AUTHORITY OF EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR
APPELLATE PROCEDURE
 
A. The State Executive Director shall be authorized to interpret the rules of the Georgia High School Association and to impose the proper penalty for their violation.  The Assistant Executive Director shall, upon the absence or at the direction of the Executive Director, have all the powers and responsibilities of the Executive Director as provided under this Constitution and the By-Laws of the GHSA.  The State Executive Director shall make all arrangements for holding and conducting the State Meets and Tournaments.
 
B. All questions pertaining to eligibility or any other matters under the rules of the Georgia High School Association must first be submitted to the State Executive Director.  If the question concerns a violation of any of the rules of the Georgia High School Association, the State Executive Director shall notify the member schools involved and advise them of the charges and advise them of their right to submit evidence and their right to request a hearing.  The State Executive Director, after hearing or examining the evidence of the party or parties concerned, shall render a decision.
 
C. Should any member school not be satisfied with the decision, appeal may then be made to the State Appeal Board by filing a written notice of appeal to the State Appeal Board through the State Executive Director within five (5) days of the date of the decision, which notice of appeal shall clearly state the decision appealed and the reasons for such appeal.  The State Executive Director shall notify the State Appeal Board and all other parties of
the appeal.  Provided however, that if the only issue under appeal is to request modification of the penalty imposed by the Executive Director, then the member school may appeal directly to the Executive Committee.
 
D. Appeal Board meetings shall be set on dates established by the Executive Director and published in the GHSA Calendar.
 
1. Any request to the Appeal Board must be in the hands of the Executive Director five (5) days before the scheduled meeting date.
 
2. Any other appeal requested (other than regularly scheduled dates) must be accompanied by a check sufficient to pay the entire estimated expenses of the Appeal Board to defray the cost of bringing the Appeal Board into session.
 
3. All requests for appeals must be in writing with the stated reasons for an appeal, and signed by the administrative head of the individual school.
 (a) An appeal of an eligibility decision must be based on one or more of the following reasons:
  (1) There is substantial new information to be submitted that was not heard by the previous group making the decision that is being appealed.
  (2) There is an allegation that a GHSA rule was misapplied in that ruling.
  (3) There is an allegation that due process was not given in previous considerations.
 (b) An appeal of a decision by the Executive Director must be based on one of the following reasons:
  (1) There is an allegation that a GHSA rule was misinterpreted.
  (2) There is an allegation that the Executive Director did not afford due process to the school.
 (c) All appeals shall set forth the basis for the appeal and the facts supporting the same, and shall be screened by the Executive Director for compliance with this rule prior to scheduling a hearing.
  
 
E. The State Appeal Board, after hearing or examining the evidence submitted by the party or parties, may affirm or reverse the decision of the Executive Director.  In order to sustain an appeal, the vote of the Appeal Board shall be unanimous.
 
F. Should any member school not be satisfied with the decision of the State Appeal Board, they may appeal to the State Executive Committee by filing a written notice of appeal to the State Executive Committee through the State Executive Director within five (5) days of the date of the decision.  The notice of appeal shall clearly state the decision being appealed and the reasons for such appeal.  Such notice of appeal shall be accompanied by a check sufficient to pay the entire expenses of the State Executive Committee when such appeal is required to be heard at a time other than regularly scheduled meetings of the State Executive Committee.
 
G. The State Executive Committee, after hearing or examining the evidence submitted by the party or parties concerned, shall render a decision to affirm, reverse, or modify the decision under appeal.
 
H. No other method of appeal shall be held valid and any appeal must begin with the first step outlined and not eliminate any step until reaching the final court of appeal, the State Executive Committee.  When the decision by the State Executive Committee is in favor of the appealing party or parties, the State Executive Committee may charge the expense of the meeting to the Georgia High School Association and reimburse the appealing party or parties.  Members of the Hardship Committee and the Appeal Board will not be eligible to vote (those members who have heard a specific case) as a member of the Executive Committee when an appeal goes before the full Executive Committee.

SECTION 10
VOTE


Each school shall have one (1) vote in a Region meeting and each member of the State Executive Committee shall have one (1) vote in the State Executive Committee meeting.
 
SECTION 11
AMEND CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS
 
A. To amend the Constitution, it shall take a two-thirds vote of the members of the Executive Committee who are present at a regular or properly called meeting at which a quorum is present. Blank ballots, abstentions and pass votes are excluded.
 
B. To amend the By-Laws, it shall take a majority vote of the members of the Executive Committee who are present at a regular or properly called meeting at which a quorum is present. Blank ballots, abstentions and pass votes are excluded.
 
C. The effective date of any changes in the Constitution & By-Laws will be the next school year unless otherwise provided by the change.
 
D. Proposed changes to the Constitution must be adopted at two separate meetings of the Executive Committee to be held not less than 30 days apart.
 
 
SECTION 12
SEMIANNUAL MEETINGS
 
A.  The State Executive Committee of the Georgia High School Association shall meet in the fall and spring of each year on such dates as may be designated by the State Executive Director.
 
B. In addition to these meetings, special meetings may be called by the State President or the Executive Director at any time or place upon giving reasonable notice to the members of the Committee.
 
C. The Executive Director is required to present an itemized statement of the income and expenditures of all funds to the State Executive Committee.
 
 
SECTION 13
VIOLATION OF RULES
 
A.  Each school is required to abide by all rules of the Georgia High School Association as promulgated by the State Executive Committee and interpreted by the Executive Director.
 
B. The Executive Director is authorized to make such investigation as may be necessary and to judge whether or not a school has violated a rule. When a school is adjudged guilty, the Executive Director is authorized to direct the penalty or penalties.
 
C. A school violating any rule, whether it be due to carelessness, willfulness, ignorance or any other cause, may be subject to a fine of not more than two thousand-five hundred dollars ($2,500.00) for each offense, and/or probation in the sports(s) in which the violation has been made, and/or suspension from the Association up to a full calendar year, and/or forfeiture of games and/or contests involved. (NOTE: See Appendix “P” at the end of this publication for a detailed schedule of fines)
 
D. PROBATION - placing a school on probation permits a school to compete in regular season games and/or contests, but bars that school from competing for any championship during the period of probation.
 
E. A school which, after investigation, is adjudged guilty of violating the rules of the Georgia High School Association shall pay the costs incidental to such investigation; such cost to be in addition to fines or penalties assessed.  Failure to pay the cost shall result in suspension or in lengthening the period of suspension.

SECTION 14
CODE OF ETHICS

 
BY-LAWS
 
The Georgia High School Association recognizes that local boards and/or governing bodies may place more stringent requirements as they deem appropriate. The Association encourages all boards of education and/or governing bodies to extend the same rules and regulations to all extra-curricular activities under their jurisdiction.

These rules establish the provisions governing student eligibility to participate in interscholastic activities.

 
A. The word “student” used in these By-Laws refers either to a boy or girl participant in interscholastic athletics, cheerleading, or literary activities.  Therefore, according to correct grammatical usage, since the antecedent “student” can involve persons of both sexes, the masculine pronouns he, his, or him used throughout said By-Laws will refer to either male or female participants.
 
B. The word “principal” used in these By-Laws refers either to a male or female head of a secondary school.  Therefore, according to correct grammatical usage, since the antecedent “principal” can involve or refer to persons of either or both sexes the masculine pronouns, he, him, or his, will refer to a male or female head of a secondary school.
 
C. The abbreviations GHSA used throughout these By-Laws refers to the Georgia High School Association.
 
 
1.10 - CERTIFICATION OF ELIGIBILITY
 
1.11 Students gain eligibility to practice or compete for the school in which they are enrolled after they have been certified by the principal of that school, after the eligibility forms have been processed by the GHSA office, and after the students have met the standards of:
 (a) academic requirements
 (b) age
 (c) semesters in high school
 (d) residence in the school's service area
 (e) transfer rules
 Note:  Students establishing eligibility  as entering 9th graders are automatically eligible for the first semester.
 
1.12 The certification of eligibility shall be submitted initially in each sport or activity no later than the date set by the GHSA for the first practice in that sport or activity.
 (a) This due date does not consider the date of the first contest scheduled.
 (b) EXCEPTION:  Literary, One-Act Play and Riflery certification is due twenty (20) days prior to the first scheduled contest.
 
1.13 If a student ruled ineligible by the GHSA, competes interscholastically due to the terms of a court restraining order or injunction against his/her school and/or the GHSA, and then has the court order vacated, stayed, reversed, or ruled unjustified; the Executive Director shall take one or more of the following actions against the school involved in the interest of restitution and fairness to the competing school(s):
 (a) Require that individual and/or team records and performances achieved during participation by the ineligible student be vacated or stricken.
 (b) Require that team victories be forfeited to the opponent(s).
 (c) Require that team awards earned by the school or individual awards earned by the ineligible student be returned to the GHSA.
 
1.20 - ENROLLMENT AND TEAM MEMBERSHIP
 
1.21 To be eligible to participate and/or try-out for a sport or activity, a student must be enrolled full time in grades 9-12 inclusive at the school seeking eligibility for that student.
 (a) Enrollment is defined as follows:
  (1)  Fall Semester: when the student participates in a practice or contest before classes begin, or the   student attends classes.
  (2) Spring Semester: when the student attends classes.
 (b) The student must be in regular attendance.
 (c) The student must be taking courses that total at least 2.5 Units that count toward graduation.
  NOTE:  If an eligible student transfers from a school that uses a block-schedule format to a school using a traditional format (or vice versa) and that student cannot get a full schedule of classes with equivalent credit, the school may petition the Executive Director for a waiver of this rule for the semester the transfer occurs.
 (d) All or part of the course load of a student may be taken online through a virtual school as long as the student’s grades are being kept at the school in which the student is enrolled. Grades from virtual school courses must be on file at the school by the first day of the new semester in order for the student to be eligible.
 
1.22 Students enrolled in grade 9 in a middle or junior high school which is a feeder school to the high school may participate in interscholastic activities for the parent school.
 
1.23 All-male schools may enlist female students from other schools to be on sideline cheerleading squads as long as the following conditions are met:
 (a)  Each cheerleader must be eligible at the school at which she is enrolled, and must have a signed release from an administrator at that school.
 (b) Each cheerleader must have a GHSA Pre-participation Physical Evaluation Form on file at the school where she will be cheering as well as at the school at which she is enrolled.
 (c) Each cheerleader must have insurance coverage comparable to all other participants in GHSA activities.
 (d) Supervision must be provided by the all-male school for all practices and games.
 
1.30 - AGE
 
To be eligible to participate in interscholastic activities, a student must not have reached his 19th birthday prior to May 1st, preceding his year of participation.
 
1.40 - LIMITS OF PARTICIPATION
 
1.41 Students must have a certificate of an annual physical examination on file at the school prior to participating in any athletic try-outs, practices, voluntary workouts or games that indicate the students are physically approved for participation.
 (a) Physical examinations will be good for twelve (12) months from the date of the exam. EXCEPTION: Any physical examination taken on or after April 1 in the preceding year will be accepted for the entire next GHSA school year.
 (b) The physical exam must be conducted by a licensed medical physician, doctor of Osteopathic medicine, nurse practitioner or a physician’s assistant.
 (c) The exam must be signed by an M.D., D.O., or by a Physician’s Assistant, or an Advance Practice Nurse who has been delegated that task by an M.D., or D.O.
 (d) The GHSA requires that member schools use the latest edition of the preparticipation physical evaluation form approved by the American Academy of Pediatrics, et. al., found on the GHSA web site.
 
1.42 A student has eight (8) consecutive semesters or four (4) consecutive years of eligibility from the date of entry into the ninth grade to be eligible for interscholastic competition.
 (a) A student is not considered to have entered the 9th grade when high school level courses are taken if the student is regularly enrolled in a school in a grade below the ninth grade.
 (b) Credits earned toward high school graduation which are taken below the ninth grade may be used when
considering high school eligibility.
 
1.43 Sub-varsity competitors must meet all eligibility requirements with the exception of the migratory rule.
 
1.44 Students in grade 9 and higher may participate on both the varsity and one (1) sub-varsity team in the same sport with the following limitations:
 (a) Football  –  a player may not participate in interscholastic competitions more than six (6) quarters per week, beginning with the varsity game.  Violations of this participation rule will result in a mandatory fine and an automatic forfeiture of the game in which the student exceeded the limit.  Additional penalties may be imposed by the Executive Director in extreme circumstances.
 (b) Basketball  –  a player may not participate in interscholastic competition more than five (5) quarters per calendar day.
 (c) Soccer  –  a player may not participate in interscholastic competition more than three (3) halves per calendar day.
 (d) All other sports  -  the combination of games or play days (varsity and sub-varsity) in which the student participates may not be greater than the limit allotted to the varsity in that sport.
 
1.45 Eighth grade students may participate on a sub-varsity team of a high school provided they attend a feeder school of that high school.
 (a) Students in grade 8 are never eligible for a varsity event in any activity.
 (b) Eighth grade students who play on a high school team must meet all middle school requirements as put forth by the State Department of Education.
 (c) An eighth grade student who is declared ineligible at a middle school or retained for academic reasons, is considered to be ineligible for participation on a sub-varsity high school team.
 (d) Eighth grade students participating on a sub-varsity team may only participate in 60% of the number of games allotted to the varsity team in that sport.
 (e) Students below the eighth grade are not eligible to participate on any high school team.
 (f) Students enrolled in grade 8 in a middle school or junior high school which is a feeder school to the member high school may participate in Spring football practice.
 (g) Students enrolled in grade 8 in a middle school or junior high school which is a feeder school to the member high school may try out for cheerleader at the high school. Eighth grade students at a non-feeder school that has no system high school may participate in cheerleader tryouts at the member high school serving the student’s area of residence. Such a student must be pre-enrolled at that member high school, and once pre-enrolled, the student has established eligibility at that high school.
 
1.46  The number of contests, starting and ending dates, and the number of practice days allowed for each sport or activity can be found listed in a calendar at the front of this publication.
 
1.47 Girls may participate on boys’ teams when there is no girls’ team offered in that sport by the school.  Boys are not allowed to play on girls’ teams even when there is no corresponding boys' sport. A student’s gender is determined by the gender noted on his/her certificate at birth.  NOTE:  Cheerleading is a coed sport.
 
1.48 Advisory Notice - Pregnant Students:  In response to the increasing number of pregnant students attending member schools, and the continued participation of these students in GHSA activities, the following advisory notice is being offered:
 (a) During the first 18 weeks of pregnancy, students, with written consent from a physician, may be allowed to participate in athletic activities except those activities in which a fall or other rapid deceleration is likely to occur.
 (b) Pregnant students should not be allowed to participate in any athletic activities after the 18th week of pregnancy.
 
1.49 Schools having students participate in athletic activities with artificial limbs must certify that the artificial limb is no more dangerous to participants than a natural limb.
 (a) A permission form must be filed with the GHSA office.
 (b) The form may be found in the Miscellaneous section on the GHSA web site.
 
1.50 - SCHOLASTIC STANDING / SCHOLARSHIP
 
1.51 To be eligible to participate, practice, and/or try out in interscholastic activities, a student must be academically eligible.  A student is required to pass classes that carry at least 2.5 Units counting toward graduation the semester immediately preceding participation.
 Exception 1:  First semester ninth grade students.
 Exception 2:  A cheerleader who is academically ineligible for the spring semester may try out if she is passing ALL classes at the time of the tryout. The window of opportunity to try out under these conditions is available only during the ten (10) days set aside for tryouts that the school chooses.
 (a) Passing in all GHSA member schools is a grade of seventy (70).
 (b) Students participating in junior varsity or “B” team competition must meet all scholastic requirements.
 (c) If an eligible student transfers from a school that uses a block-schedule format to a school using a traditional format (or vice versa) and that student cannot get a full schedule of classes with equivalent credit in    
the semester of the transfer, the school may petition the Executive Director for a waiver of this rule for the first semester after the transfer occurs.
 (d) For schools offering courses with yearlong grading, eligibility must be computed for each semester.
  (1) At the end of the first semester, the school must determine that the student has a grade of 70% or  higher in classes carrying at least 2.5 Units.
  (2)  The second semester grade will be the grade given for the entire course and shall include the  end-of-course test grade.
  (3) Remediation programs designed to bring the student’s first semester grade up to 70% or higher may
    be used (in accordance with GHSA guidelines) if the school allows such programs for all students.
 
1.52 Students gain or lose eligibility on the first day of the subsequent semester.  The first day of the Fall semester shall be interpreted as the first date of practice for the first sport.
 (a) Exception: Students who successfully complete summer school to maintain eligibility become eligible the last day of summer school.
  (1) Summer school is an extension of the previous semester and courses may be:
    a.  remedial in nature where a previously-taken course is repeated in its entirety with a new grade
        being given.
    b. enrichment in nature where a new course is taken that results in new credit being earned.
  (2) A maximum of two (2) unit credits earned in summer school may be counted for eligibility purposes. NOTE: Additional credits may be earned in credit recovery programs or make-up programs.
  (3) Summer school credits earned in non-accredited home study programs or non-accredited private schools may not be used to gain eligibility.  Accreditation recognized under the rule shall be from the Georgia Accrediting Commission (GAC) or a regional accreditation agency (such as SACS) or the Georgia Private School Accreditation Council (GAPSAC).
  (4) An independent study course taken in summer school must be regionally accredited and accepted by the school system for graduation credit.
 (b) Courses completed after the beginning of a new semester may not be used to gain eligibility for that semester.  Example:  night school classes, correspondence courses, etc.
 (c) Independent study courses taken during the school year must meet the criteria of 1.52 (a) 4.
 
1.53 Students must accumulate units towards graduation according to the following criteria:
 (a) First-year students (entering 9th grade) are eligible academically. Second semester first-year students must have passed courses carrying at least 2.5 units the previous semester in order to participate.
 (b) Second-year students must have accumulated five (5) total units in the first year, AND passed courses carrying at least 2.5 units in the previous semester.
 (c) Third-year students must have accumulated eleven (11) units in the first and second years, AND passed courses carrying at least 2.5 units in the previous semester.
 (d) Fourth-year students must have accumulated seventeen (17) units in the first three years, AND passed courses carrying at least 2.5 units in the previous semester.
 (e) Students may accumulate the required units for participation during the school year and eligibility will be reinstated at the beginning of the next semester.
 
 
 
ADVISORY NOTICE:  CURRICULAR INNOVATIONS
A. BLOCK FOUR PROGRAMS:
 1. The student takes four courses that are worth one (1) unit each and the classes meet twice the number of hours per week as in the standard curricular programs.
 2. To be eligible, a student must earn at least 2.5 units.
 3. Unit requirements are the same in all curricular programs.
 
B. BLOCK EIGHT PROGRAMS:
 1. The student takes eight courses at some time during the term, and each course is worth one-half unit.
 2. To be eligible, a student must earn at least 2.5 units during the term.
 3. Unit requirements are the same in all curricular programs.
 
C. HYBRID SCHEDULING:
 1. Definition: A student takes a combination of courses scheduled as block courses, yearlong courses and/or traditional courses.
 2. To be eligible, a student must be enrolled in a combination of courses that carry at least 2.5 units.
 3. To be eligible, a student must have passed a combination of courses the previous semester that carries at least 2.5 units.
 
 
 
1.54 A Dual Enrollment program is defined as a program in which a fulltime student at a GHSA member high school takes one or more courses from a state public or private postsecondary institution and receives credit at the high school (toward graduation) and at the postsecondary institution.
 (a) Dual enrolled students shall take courses that are approved by the Georgia Department of Education.
 (b) Courses may be taken in a variety of formats (including distance learning and virtual courses) as long
  as the courses are approved.
 (c) Postsecondary semester hour credit shall be converted to high school unit credit as follows:
  (1) 1-2 semester hours equates to .5 unit
  (2) 3-5 semester hours equates to 1 unit
 (d) Postsecondary quarter hour credit shall be converted to high school unit credit as follows:
  (1) 1-3 quarter hours equates to .5 unit
  (2) 4-8 quarter hours equates to 1 unit
 
1.55 Students involved in approved Dual Enrollment programs shall be eligible to participate in GHSA activities provided that academic eligibility is maintained.
 (a) Courses taken each semester at the high school and/or postsecondary institution must total at least 2.5 units.
 (b) Courses passed the previous semester at the high school and/or postsecondary institution must total at least 2.5 units
 (c) Students will gain or lose eligibility on the first day of each semester at the high school and a college calendar that differs from the high school calendar may cause problems.
 (d) Students who withdraw or are dropped from a Dual Enrollment program and are returned to the high school only, may encounter eligibility problems.
 (e) Students involved in Joint Enrollment programs, Early College programs, or Gateway to College programs may not be eligible at their respective high schools.
 (f) A student who participates on an intercollegiate athletic team may not participate in any GHSA activity.
 
1.56 Loss of Eligibility:  Students assigned to an alternative school or on out-of-school suspension for disciplinary reasons, or adjudicated to YDC, lose their eligibility.  Suspension is considered to have ended when the student is physically readmitted to the classroom.
 
1.57 Failure to Meet Academic Standards:  When a school administrator believes that the student has failed to meet the academic eligibility requirements due to conditions that were beyond the control of the school, the student, and/or his parents, and such that none of them could have been expected reasonably to comply with the rule, he may request that the student's case be put on the agenda of the Hardship Committee.
 (a) Ignorance of the rule(s) on the part of any individual is not sufficient cause to set aside the rule(s).
 (b) Schools must supply all the materials requested on the Hardship Application Form on the GHSA website.
 
1.58 Credit Recovery/Make-up Work:  Students who have academic deficiencies at the end of a semester may make up those deficiencies in programs that are available to any student in the school. NOTE: Programs allowing students to recover academic credit have a variety of names in various schools.
 (a) Credit recovery programs are short-term programs that involve a course that has been completed and a grade given.  The student is given the opportunity to work on areas of deficiency.
 (b) Make-up programs occur when a course has not been completed and an “Incomplete” grade has been given.  The student is given the opportunity to work on areas of deficiency.
 (c) Credit recovery and make-up work must be completed within fifteen (15) school days after the start of the next semester. The student is ineligible until such time as the work is completed and the required passing grade has been recorded. Exception: If the end-of-course test is not offered within 14 days of the beginning of the next semester, the student may be granted a reasonable extension by the GHSA.
 (d) The GHSA Executive Director shall be authorized to approve credit recovery or make-up work completed later than fifteen (15) days after the start of the next semester if he finds that the:
  (1) timeframe was not met due to circumstances outside the control of the student, his parent(s), and  the school, AND
  (2) work was completed as soon as reasonably possible, AND
 
1.59  Students with disabilities:
 (a) A student with disabilities who is enrolled in a special education program which is not physically located at the parent school (example:  psycho-education center, regional occupation center, community-based instruction class, etc.) shall be eligible to participate, practice, and/or try out in interscholastic activities at the parent school if IEP (Individual Education Program) requirements are met.
 (b) Schools with students having to meet only IEP requirements for course credit must establish an accounting process for the number of courses passed each semester, and for the awarding of units. Requirements for the date of entry into the ninth grade and for age apply to students with IEPs without variation.
 (c) Competitive interscholastic activities administered through local special education programs shall follow Georgia Department of Education guidelines and procedures for special education, and are exempt from GHSA requirements.
 
1.60 - SCHOOL SERVICE AREAS / TRANSFER / MIGRANT STUDENTS / MIGRATORY WAIVER
 
1.61  School service areas for member public schools are those attendance boundaries established by local boards of education from which a school normally draws its students.  The school service area for a member private school  is the county in which the private school is located.  The school service area for a startup or converted charter school will be the same as the school from which the charter school draws its students.
 
1.62 A transfer student who has established eligibility at a former school in grades 9-12 shall be immediately eligible at the new school if:
 (a) The student moved simultaneously with the entire parental unit or persons he/she resided with at the former school, and the student and parent(s) or persons residing with the student live in the service area of the new school  This is known as a “bona fide move.”
  (1) The student may choose the public or private school serving that area.
  (2) It must be apparent that the parent(s) or the persons residing with the student and the student have relinquished the residence in the former service area and have occupied a residence in the new service area.
  (3) Relinquishment of the former residence may be met by one of the following procedures: selling the residence; having the residence listed with a real estate agent for sale at a fair market value; having a contract with a buyer; having a lease agreement at a fair market value; or abandoning the house and shutting off unnecessary utilities. When a family claims multiple residences, the residence for which they apply for a homestead exemption will be declared the primary residence.
  (4) The bona fide move is validated when the student’s family maintains the new residence for at least one calendar year. A return to the previous residence within that year renders the student to be a migrant student. All hardship appeal processes are available.
 (b) The student was enrolled in a private school or a magnet school and has a bona fide move from one public school service area to another public school service area.  A student in this situation may attend either the public school or a private school serving his area of residence. (Note: This by-law was temporarily deleted by vote of the State Executive Committee as of 9/15/2014)
 (c) The student was enrolled in a non-member private school in Georgia or was boarded at a school out of state and, without a bona fide move, transferred to a GHSA member school that serves his area of residence as long as:
  (1) The student was enrolled at the high school serving his/her area of residence in grades 9-12 before attending the non-member school, OR
  (2) The student has not yet established eligibility at grades 9-12 at a member school serving his area of residence, OR
  (3) the student has previously established his attendance at a school other than the school serving his area of residence, and chooses to return to that school, AND
  (4) it is the initial move of the student from a non-member school to a member school serving his area of residence. (NOTE: Rules about joint custody transfers overrule the one-time transfer restriction in this by-law.)
 (d) The student transfers from a non-member home school and the receiving school grants credit so that the student has accumulated sufficient units.  At the time such credit is given, the student  must also have passed a minimum of at least 2.5 units the previous semester.  The student becomes eligible when credit is awarded officially.
 (e) The student is involved in a foreign exchange program that is approved and published on the “Advisory List of International Educational Travel and Exchange Programs” published by the Council on Standards for International Educational Travel (CSIET). This list is found on the GHSA web site.
  (1) The student shall be considered eligible for a maximum period of one calendar year.
  (2) The student shall not be a graduate of a secondary school in his home country.
  (3) The student must maintain eligibility requirements at the member school.
  (4) The foreign exchange program must assign students to schools by a method that insures that no student, school, or other interested party may influence the assignment for athletic purposes.
  (5) All eligibility forms (Form B) for  foreign exchange students must be accompanied by documentation from the CSIET-approved foreign exchange program showing that the student has been placed according to the normal procedures for that agency.
 (f) If one of his/her parents or the custodial parent is a certified teacher or administrator teaching at the receiving school. This opportunity is available one time only at any given school. (NOTE: Rules about joint custody transfers overrule the one-time transfer restriction in this by-law.)
 (g) The student has one of the following family-related situations that produces a waiver of the bona fide move rule:
  (1) There is a Superior Court or Juvenile Court awarded change of permanent custody and the student moves to the residence of the parent receiving custody.
   (a) The student must attend the member school serving that area of residence.
   (b) A copy of the court order must accompany the eligibility forms.
   (c) NOTE: Temporary guardianship papers issued by a Probate Court are not valid for eligibility.
  (2) There is a Superior Court or Juvenile Court final order awarding permanent joint custody to the parents and the student moves to a residence of his or her parent outside the service area of the previous school.
   (a) This waiver may be made one time during a calendar year.
   (b) A copy of the court order must accompany the eligibility forms.
  (3) There is a death of a custodial parent and the student moves to live with the other natural parent in a new school service area.
   NOTE:  A copy of the death certificate shall be submitted with the eligibility papers.
  (4) There is a military transfer of one or both custodial parents that creates a change of residence that is not a bona fide move. NOTE: A copy of the deployment order shall be submitted with the eligibility form.
 (h) Students who are transferred from one school attendance area to another school attendance area by a mandate of the local board of education maintain their eligibility.
 (i) Married students setting up a household (domicile) shall be eligible in the school of their residence provided they meet all other requirements of eligibility.
 (j) Students at the Atlanta School for the Deaf will be eligible at the school serving their area of residence provided they meet all other eligibility requirements.
 (k) The migratory rule (See 1.63) will be waived one time for students entering the following boarding schools:
  Ben Franklin Academy Rabun Gap School  Riverside Military Academy
  Tallulah Falls School
  Exception:  Students from foreign countries not on an approved foreign exchange program are not eligible.
 (l) Students entering a school as an “unaccompanied youth” under the conditions of the McKinney-Vento Act must go through the hardship appeal process to become eligible.
 
1.63 A “migrant student” is a student who transfers into a GHSA school without a bona fide move or without one of the exceptions listed in by-law 1.62. The student may practice or compete at the sub-varsity level, but may not compete at the varsity level for one calendar year from the date of his entry into the new school.
 
1.64 A student who is not eligible because of GHSA rules at the former school, and then transfers to a new school, cannot regain eligibility by the transfer. Ineligible students cannot gain eligibility by being adjudicated to YDC and subsequently returning to their resident school with earned credit.
 
1.65 Students whose transfers from member school to member school have been approved by the GHSA office after the end of regular season play or during post-season play are not eligible for participation in GHSA sponsored tournaments and/or playoffs in that particular sport for the school year of transfer.
 
1.66 A student who is not eligible at one school because of suspension or expulsion and then transfers to a member school cannot regain eligibility by such a transfer, for the length of the suspension or one calendar year, whichever is less.
 
1.67 A permissive transfer is defined as an allowance by a local board of education for students and/or their parents to choose a school to attend without regard to the location of residence.  
 (a) A student transferring from member school to member school on a permissive transfer is considered a migrant student.
 (b) A student transferring to or from a school housing a system-wide, singular academic or vocation program or a magnet program on a permissive transfer is considered a migrant student.
  (1) The offering of an individual course or series of courses by one school in a system does not provide
   inherent justification to grant GHSA eligibility.
  (2) Special options offered by a school system that allow students to attend a school outside their area
   of residence do not provide inherent justification to grant GHSA eligibility.
  (3) Any such permissive transfer issue may be brought before the GHSA Hardship Committee.
 (c) Students transferring under the provisions of Federal or State academic accountability regulations must be processed through the normal hardship appeals process.
 (d) When a military base is located in two school districts, a student moving onto the base for the first time may choose to attend either school district, and that district will place the student appropriately. Any transfer after the initial move will be subject to standard eligibility regulations.
 
1.68 Hardship Applications may be filed by an administrator at a member school when a student does not meet the standards of eligibility outlined  in by-laws 1.50 (academic issues) and 1.60 (transfer issues).
 (a) The GHSA Constitution (Art. IV; Sec. 5; Subsection B4) specifies that the hardship issues must be beyond the reasonable control of the persons involved.
 (b) The process of appealing a decision of the Hardship Committee is outlined in the GHSA Constitution (Art. IV, Sec. 9, Subsection  C & D).
 (c) In order for a hardship appeal based on a financial hardship to be approved, the new school must provide proof that the family attempted to address the financial problem at the previous school, and that the need-based financial aid was non-existent or insufficient to resolve the problem. Increases in tuition or other costs at a private school do not create an automatic reason to grant the appeal, because such fee increases are considered foreseeable and not unavoidable. Documentation of the financial problem is required.
 
1.69 When a new school opens, student eligibility shall be determined as follows:
 (a) When a school district mandates an attendance area for a new school for all grades enrolled at the new school, all students living within the mandated attendance area in those grades are immediately eligible. All students living outside the mandated attendance area who desire to attend the new school are considered migrant students and are ineligible for one year. Hardship appeals may be filed if conditions warrant.
 (b) When a school district mandates some students to attend the new school, allows some students to stay at their present school, and permits some students to transfer to the new school, the school shall set a deadline for students living in the attendance area of the new school to decide whether they will move to the new school, or stay at the present school. The decisions exercised at the deadline date are binding. Subsequent changes render the student to be a migrant student with the one-year period of ineligibility. Students who are granted permissive transfers to enroll at the new school from other schools within the system are considered to be migrant students. Hardship appeals may be filed if conditions warrant.
 
1.70 - RECRUITING/UNDUE INFLUENCE   
 
1.71  Recruiting and Undue Influence is defined as the use of influence by any person connected directly or indirectly with a GHSA school to induce a student of any age to transfer from one school to another, or to enter the ninth grade at a member school for athletic or literary competition purposes, whether or not the school presently attended by the student is a member of the GHSA.
 (a) The use of undue influence to secure OR retain a student for competitive purposes is prohibited, and shall lead to penalties being assessed against either school. NOTE: This violation may cause the student to forfeit eligibility for one year from the date of enrollment.
 (b) Evidence of undue influence includes, but is not limited to:
  (1) personal contact initiated by coaches, boosters, or other school personnel in an attempt to persuade
   transfer
  (2) gifts of money, jobs, supplies or clothing
  (3) free transportation
  (4) free admission to contests
  (5) an invitation to attend practices and/or games
  (6) a social event (other than an official schoolwide Open House program) specifically geared for   prospective athletes
  (7) free tuition beyond the allowable standards found in by-law 1.82
  (8) a coach asking a prospective student for contact information
 (c) Complaints or reports of violations of this rule will be investigated and handled on a case-by-case basis.  If coaches are found to be in violation of the recruiting rule, a copy of the investigation will be forwarded to the Professional Standards Commission of the Department of Education.
 (d) A school will be afforded an opportunity to demonstrate it could not reasonably be expected to be responsible for the actions of a booster who is found to have violated the recruiting/undue influence rules.
 
1.72  A student athlete transferring from one member school to another shall be ruled ineligible for one year because of “undue influence” if it is proven that:
 (a) The coach of the receiving school coached an out-of-school team or all-star team on which the athlete played prior to the transfer; OR
 (b) The coach at the receiving school acted as a private athletic instructor for the transferring athlete, regardless of whether the coach was paid for his services and/or expertise; OR
 (c) The student participated in a sports camp or clinic run by a member school and/or its coach(es).
 (d) The player who played for a coach at a former GHSA school followed that coach when he/she moved to another GHSA school. (This is not applicable to dependent children of the coach.)
 (e) The situations cited in this by-law are considered to be violations even if a bona fide move has occurred, and the hardship appeal procedures are available for the demonstration that undue influence has not occurred.
 
1.73  A booster shall be considered to be an extension of the school and must abide by all rules applied to coaches and other school personnel.  The following persons or groups may be considered boosters: members of the school’s Booster Club; alumni; parents; guardians; or relatives of a student or former student; financial donors; or donors of time and effort.
 
1.80 - FINANCIAL AID
 
1.81 Any student who receives financial aid or non-GHSA approved gifts from any source and in any form (scholarships, tuition remission, cash, gifts, etc.) arising out of or received in connection with their participation in any sport or literary event shall be ruled ineligible. The duration of the ineligibility will last as long as the illegal benefits are being received. This prohibition shall not apply to awards under By-Law #1.90 or to other items approved by the GHSA.
 (a) If tuition is charged, it must be paid by a parent, legal guardian, or other family member with the exception of payments coming from need-based financial aid.
 (b) It is not legal for donated funds to be designated for a specific student that are given by non-family members, businesses, churches or other organizations, except for programs specified by state law.
 (c) Schools may not employ students to work off their tution costs.
 (d) The GHSA Executive Director will determine whether the financial aid or gift arose out of or in connection with participation in any sport or literary event.
 (e) If a school allows a student who has received such financial aid or gifts to participate in competition, the Executive Director shall assess an appropriate penalty.
 
1.82 Financial aid in the form of free or reduced tuition or other aid must be need-based aid as determined by a national student aid service or financial aid based on institutional policies for academic performance (classroom record and/or test scores) that is administered by persons not in the athletic department.
 
1.83 Member schools who award financial aid shall issue a statement to the Executive Director signed by the principal or headmaster of the school giving the following information:
 (a) number of students enrolled in the school
 (b) number of students receiving financial aid
 (c) names of students (or a listing of student identification numbers) receiving financial aid who are involved in GHSA activities
 (d) certification that the percentage of students who participate in activities and who receive financial aid is the same percentage as the number of students receiving financial aid who do not participate in activities (plus or minus 5%)
 
1.90 - AMATEUR STATUS/AWARDS  
 
1.91 A student who represents a school in interscholastic athletic competition shall be an amateur in that activity.
 (a) An amateur athlete is one who engages in athletic competition solely for the physical, mental, social, and pleasure benefits derived therefrom.
 (b) Accepting nominal, standard fees or salary for instructing, supervising, or officiating in an organized youth sports program or recreation, playground or camp activity, shall not jeopardize an athlete's amateur status.
 (c) Reasonable compensation derived from private lessons in a sport is permissible.
 
1.92 An athlete forfeits amateur status in a sport by:
 (a) competing for money or other monetary compensations except for reasonable allowances for travel, meals, and lodging. NOTE: Accepting expense allowances authorized by the United States Olympic Committee for Olympic Development Programs is acceptable for GHSA students.
 (b) receiving any award or prize of monetary value which has not been approved by the GHSA.
 (c) capitalizing on athletic fame by receiving money or gifts with monetary value except college scholarships.
 (d) signing a professional playing contract in any sport, or hiring an agent to manage his/her athletic career.
 
1.93 Only awards approved by the GHSA may be accepted by a high school student-athlete as a result of participation in school or non-school competition in a sport recognized by the GHSA.
 
1.94 Symbolic awards (i.e. non-cash) presented for winning or placing in GHSA competitions are limited to $250 per year, per student in the aggregrate, paid by the local school. These are the only GHSA-approved awards for interscholastic competition. Beyond this, a student may receive one (1) school sweater or jacket presented by the school during his high school career.
 
1.95 Athletes competing in golf or tennis events are limited to awards as specified in the United States Golf Association Rules of Golf, and the United States Tennis Association Handbook of Tennis Rules and
 Regulations, which includes (but not limited to) the following:
 (a) No cash awards may be accepted.
 (b) Merchandise awards in tennis may be accepted up to a retail value of $250.00.
 (c) Merchandise awards in golf may be accepted up to a retail value of $750.00.
 
1.96 Players attending national camps or all-star events may keep reasonable benefits for housing, meals and transportation.  Players may keep only equipment that is commemorative in nature and/or used in the process of the event’s workouts.
 
 
 
BY-LAW 1.10 - CERTIFICATION OF ELIGIBILITY
 
n SITUATION: A student athlete and his parents move from the service area of School A to School B, and meet all eligibility requirements.  When may he participate in interscholastic activities at School B?
 
 INTERPRETATION: The student is eligible as soon as he is enrolled at School B and certified as being eligible by the GHSA. Academic eligibility must be certified before the student may try out or practice.
 
BY-LAW 1.20 - ENROLLMENT AND TEAM MEMBERSHIP  
 
8TH GRADE PARTICIPATION
 
n SITUATION:  May eighth-grade students participate on sub-varsity teams at a member school?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes.  Eighth-grade students in a feeder school for a member school may participate on one sub-varsity team, but never on a varsity team.
 
n SITUATION:  An eighth-grade student desires to try out in the Spring for the cheerleading team at a member school.  Is this legal if the school the student is attending is a feeder school for the member school?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes.  Also, an eighth grade student in a private school that does not offer classes at the ninth grade level and above may try out for cheerleading at the public or private school serving that student's area of residence.  Such a tryout must be preceded by a pre-enrollment at that GHSA school. The tryout establishes the student's eligibility at that school. NOTE: This procedure also applies to participation in spring football practice.
 
TRYOUT REQUIREMENTS
 
n SITUATION:  A tenth-grade student who is on a cheerleading team at a member school anticipates moving to another part of the state over the Summer.  May the student try out for the new school before the move is made?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No.  A student may not practice or try out at a member school until that student is properly enrolled at the new school.  A student may be enrolled in only one school at a time.
 
BY-LAW 1.30 - AGE
 
n SITUATION: A student becomes 19 years of age on April 30, prior to his fourth year in high school.  May the student participate in the fourth year?
 
 INTERPRETATION: No. May 1 is the cut-off date.
 
BY-LAW 1.40 - LIMITS OF PARTICIPATION
 
EIGHT SEMESTER RULE
 
n SITUATION: A student entered a member school eight (8) semesters ago.  He was injured and missed one-half of the first semester of his senior year (7th semester).  During the first six semesters, he has accumulated seventeen (17) units, and in the 8th semester he passed five courses and gained an additional 2.5 units.  Is he eligible to participate the following Fall in his 9th semester?
 
 INTERPRETATION: No. There are no provisions to allow for a student to participate beyond eight (8) semesters.  His case could be presented to the GHSA Executive Committee for a request to waive the eight semester rule (By-Law #1.42) by Hardship application.
 
NON-SCHOOL PARTICIPATION
 
n SITUATION: A student is a member of a high school soccer team and a club soccer team whose seasons run concurrently.  Is this permissible?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes.  There is no state regulation prohibiting “dual participation” on the part of a student.  The high school coach may not be involved in the non-school program, however. A local school may impose a rule prohibiting dual participation.
 
GIRLS ON BOYS TEAMS
 
n SITUATION: A girl wants to be on the high school wrestling team made up of boys.  If she meets eligibility requirements, may she do so?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes.  Girls may participate on boys teams when there is no girls team in that sport at that school.
 
n SITUATION:  A female student desires to try out for the boys’ baseball team.  May she do this?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes, she is allowed to try out since there is no girls’ baseball team.
 
n SITUATION:  A male student desires to play on a girls volleyball team. Is this legal?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No. The Federal Title IX legislation and the Georgia Equity in Sports Act both specify that the traditionally represented gender in athletics (males) may not play on teams designed for the traditionally under-represented gender (females).
 
SUB-VARSITY AND VARSITY PARTICIPATION
 
n SITUATION:  A junior varsity basketball player participates in a JV game on Tuesday afternoon.  May he also participate in the varsity game that night?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes, but the student may not participate in more than five (5) quarters that day.
 
n SITUATION:  A junior varsity football player plays in a JV game on Thursday.  May he also play in the varsity game on Friday?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes, but the student may not participate in more than six (6) quarters in a calendar week.  The schedule week (Sunday through Saturday) begins with the day of the varsity game.
 
n QUESTION:  In sports other than football, basketball, and soccer, what are the restrictions on students participating on both sub-varsity and varsity teams?
 
 ANSWER:  The total number of regular-season games and tournaments a student participates in on a sub-varsity team and the varsity team may not exceed the number of games and tournaments allotted to the varsity team in that sport.  Example:  A sport allows 18 varsity games plus two tournaments.  A student could legally play in 10 JV games, 8 varsity games, 1 JV tournament, and 1 varsity tournament.
 
n SITUATION:  At an invitational cheerleading tournament, a AAAAA school enters its varsity team in the competition for its class, and its JV team in the competition for varsity teams of smaller schools?  Is this legal?
 
 RULING:  No.  Varsity teams must compete against varsity teams and non-varsity against non-varsity teams in all GHSA activities.  The eligibility standards are different in the two levels of competition, and it is possible to manipulate the limits on competition by allowing this to occur.  New schools and schools just beginning a sport may petition the Executive Director for a waiver of this rule.
 
BY-LAW 1.50 - SCHOLASTIC STANDING/SCHOLARSHIP
 
DUAL ENROLLMENT PROGRAMS
 
n SITUATION: During the first semester of his senior year, a student is enrolled for three traditional courses (subjects) leading toward graduation at a member school, and one course for 5 hours of credit at a local      
college that will be accepted by his home school for graduation credit. If the student passes all the courses for which he is enrolled and has accumulated the proper number of units, is he eligible to participate in golf during the second semester?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes.  If the student is enrolled in a dual enrollment program, the student must be enrolled for at least 2.5 units and must pass courses giving at least 2.5 units.
 
ADVANCE PLACEMENT
 
n SITUATION:  May a student take a college or junior college class and receive credit for this work which may be counted toward scholastic eligibility?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes. Such a class may be counted toward academic eligibility, provided that the student's high school accepts the credit and counts it toward graduation. The student still must pass a minimum of 2.5 units at the end of the semester.
 
ELIGIBILITY ENDS
 
n SITUATION:  A student who is eligible at the beginning of basketball season only passes classes carrying two (2) units in the first semester which ends on December 17th.  Is this student eligible to play in a basketball tournament December 20-23?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  The student loses eligibility on the first day of the second semester. If the tournament is played before the start of the new semester, he is eligible to play by GHSA standards.
 
ELIGIBILITY BEGINS
 
n SITUATION:  A student who is academically ineligible for the second semester passes all courses that semester and has accumulated the proper number of units. May this student participate in practices that occur before the beginning of classes in the Fall?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes. The student becomes eligible on the first day of the fall semester. The beginning of the first semester is interpreted as the first day of the first sport, or the first day of classes – whichever comes first.
 
n SITUATION:  A student passes four (4) courses the last semester of the eighth grade. Is this student eligible the first semester of the ninth-grade year?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes. Every student entering the ninth grade for the first time begins with a “clean slate.”
 
SUMMER SCHOOL RULES
 
n SITUATION: A student needs a science course for graduation purposes that is not taught during Summer School.  The student and principal agree on an independent study course monitored by a coach.  May this course be used for eligibility purposes?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes, as long as the course is regionally accredited and accepted by the school district for graduation credit.
 
n SITUATION:  How many units may a student earn in Summer School for the purpose of gaining academic eligibility for the Fall?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  A maximum of two (2) units of credit earned in Summer School may be counted for eligibility purposes.
 
ALTERNATIVE SCHOOL RULES
 
n SITUATION: A student is assigned to attend an alternative school for the remainder of the semester for disciplinary reasons.  May the student participate on the football team during the time he will be attending the alternative school?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No. Students assigned to an alternative school for reasons of misconduct or who are in out-of-school suspension may not participate until they have returned physically to the regular classroom. The school may appeal to the Executive Director if a school holiday prevents the student from physically returning to the classroom at the end of the penalty.
 
OUT-OF-STATE RULES
 
n SITUATION: A student transfers to a member school from another state where scholastic eligibility rules are less restrictive than Georgia.  The student is academically eligible by the standards of the state from which he transfers, but lacks sufficient credits to be eligible by GHSA standards.  As a transfer student, is he eligible academically?
 
 INTERPRETATION: No.
 
ANNUAL GRADING
 
n SITUATION:  Since GHSA eligibility rules are written to apply to schools with semester grading, do schools that have yearlong classes with one grade given at the end of the year have to monitor eligibility for the first half of the year?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes.  Schools must determine that each student-athlete has a grade of 70% or higher in courses carrying at least 2.5 units at the end of the first semester. Any student not meeting that standard is academically ineligible.
 
n SITUATION:  A student taking yearlong classes has a failing grade for the second semester, but the yearlong grade that includes end-of-course test results is above 70%. Will the student be eligible for the next semester?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes - the grade reported to the GHSA for the spring semester will be the yearlong grade.
 
MULTI-UNIT COURSES
 
n SITUATION: A student is enrolled for four (4) regular courses (carrying .5 units each), and one vocational course that carries the equivalent of two (2) units.  If the student fails the vocational course, is the student eligible the next semester?
 
 INTERPRETATION: No. Since the vocational course carries the equivalent of two (2) units and since the student passed courses totaling only 2 units, he would not be eligible for the next semester.
 
MAKE-UP WORK
 
n SITUATION: A student taking five (5) subjects that carry .5 units each receives an “Incomplete” in one of those courses.  When the student returns to class on the first day of the next semester, is he eligible to practice or play?
 
 INTERPRETATION: No. If the school allows make-up work for all students and the student makes up the “Incomplete” to a passing grade within fifteen (15) school days of the beginning of the new semester, the student could become eligible.  The student is not eligible while the work is being made up.
 
TRYOUT ELIGIBILITY
 
n SITUATION: Cheerleader tryouts for the following year are to be held in the Spring (second semester).  A student who earned only two (2) units during the first semester would like to try out. Is this permissible?
 
 INTERPRETATION: If the student is passing ALL courses at the time of the tryout, the student may participate.
 
ACCUMULATING UNITS
 
n SITUATION: A 9th grade student passed courses totaling two units in the first semester and is ineligible for second semester. The student passed five courses in the second semester, giving him an accumulation of 4.5 units for the year. Is the student eligible at the beginning of the second year?
 
 INTERPRETATION: No. The student must have accumulated at least five (5) units during the first year in order to be eligible in the second year.
 
n SITUATION:  At the beginning of the 11th-grade year (third year of eligibility), a student has only accumulated 8 units and is declared ineligible for the first semester.  If the student passes all six (6) courses, and accumulates 3 units during the first semester, is the student eligible at the beginning of the second semester?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes.  Since the student has accumulated 11 units at the beginning of the second semester of the third year of eligibility, he is eligible.  A student may gain the units during the school year, and becomes eligible the first day of the next semester.
 
ADVANCED PLACEMENT COURSES
 
n SITUATION:  A student is enrolled for three (3) Advanced Placement courses and two regular classes in the first semester, and all courses carry .5 units.  If the student fails one of the AP courses, is he eligible to participate second semester?
 
 INTERPRETATION: No. There are no allowances made for course difficulty in the rule requiring the accumulation of 2.5 units the previous semester.
 
BLOCK-FOUR PROGRAMS
 
n SITUATION:  A member school has adopted the Block-Four Program in which students take four (4) courses each semester and receive  one (1) unit for each course passed.  How many units does a student have to accumulate each semester in order to be eligible?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  The students will have to accumulate at least 2.5 units each semester in order to be eligible.
 
n SITUATION:  A school is on the Block-Four Program and, additionally, requires a student to take a Physical Education course that earns .5 unit.  A student passes two (2) courses in the Block-Four setup plus the PE class.  Is the student eligible?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes.  The two block courses provide a total of 2 units and the P.E. course provides a total of .5 units. This meets the GHSA requirement of at least 2.5 units.
 
n SITUATION:  A student in a Block-Four setting only passes one class in the Spring Semester.  The student passes three (3) classes carrying .5 units each in Summer School. Is the student eligible for Fall participation?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes.  The one block course provides one (1) unit and the three summer school courses provide 1.5 units, meeting the GHSA requirement of at least 2.5 units.
 
BLOCK-EIGHT PROGRAMS
 
n SITUATION:  A member school has adopted the Block-Eight Program in which students take eight courses over the semester and each one passed accumulates one-half unit.  How many courses do students at this school have to pass in order to be eligible for interscholastic activities?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  The students will have to earn at least 2.5 units each semester to be eligible.  The unit requirements remain the same as with any system of courses.
 
HYBRID SCHEDULING
 
n SITUATION:  A student is taking two yearlong courses, two Block 4 courses and one traditional course during the semester. If the student failed one of the Block 4 courses, is he academically eligible for the next semester?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes. The two yearlong courses and the one traditional course carry 1.5 units, and the Block 4 course he passed carried one (1) unit. This gives the student the 2.5 units he needs to be eligible.
 
BY-LAW 1.60 - SCHOOL SERVICE AREAS/TRANSFER STUDENTS/
    MIGRANT STUDENTS/MIGRATORY RULE WAIVERS
 
SCHOOL SERVICE AREAS
 
n QUESTION: What is a public school’s service area?
 
 ANSWER: A school service area is the geographic boundary established by local boards of education that determine the public school a student must attend.  NOTE:  The service area is also referred to in this book as the “attendance area” and “area of residence.”
 
n QUESTION:  What is the service area designation for private schools?
 
 ANSWER:  The service area for a private school is the county in which the campus is physically located.  This restriction only affects students who transfer into the school after beginning their high school careers at other schools.
 
n SITUATION:  A 10th grade student moves to a county that has four school service areas (A, B, C, and D), and a city school system (service area E).  The student and his parents reside in the service area of School “A,” but the student decides to enter School “E.”  Is the student eligible in the new school?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No.  When a student and his parents move to a new service area, the student established eligibility at the school that serves his area of residence.  When the student and his parents “elected” to attend a school outside his area of residence, the student became a migrant student.
 
FIRST-TIME ENROLLMENT
 
n SITUATION:  A county has a school for students living in the county, and a separate school for students living in the city.  The local boards of education allow students to choose whichever school they wish to attend (with or without tuition payments).  A student and his parents live in the city, and the student is enrolled for the first time in ninth grade at the county school. Will he be able to participate in interscholastic activities?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes. On a first-time entrance into the ninth grade, a student may enroll in the school of his choice if the local board of education gives approval.  Once that choice is made, any other transfers must be accompanied by a corresponding move by the student and his parents.  If the student transferred back to the school that serves his area of residence, the student would be ineligible for varsity competition for one year.
 
BONA FIDE MOVE DEFINED
 
n QUESTION:  What is meant by the term “bona fide move?”
 
 ANSWER:  A “bona fide move” is defined as the actual physical relocation of all immediate family members residing in the previous residence, with the intent to reside indefinitely, and to relinquish the previous residence.
 
THE TRANSFER RULE
 
n SITUATION:  A student attends School “A” while living in that school's attendance area.  He and his parents move into the service area of public School “B,” and the student enrolls in School “B.”  Is the student eligible to participate in interscholastic activities?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes.  This is a classic example of a bona fide move.
 
n SITUATION:  A student and his parents reside in the service area for a county school.  The student enters the ninth grade at a non-member private school.  At the end of the ninth-grade year, the student wishes to transfer from the non-member school to the high school that serves his area of residence.  Will the student be eligible at the member school?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes.  A student may transfer from a non-member school to a member school serving his area of residence one time in his high school career as long as all other eligibility criteria are met.
 
n SITUATION:  A student begins ninth grade at the school that serves his area of residence.  With one month to go in the school year, the student transfers to a non-member private school.  At the beginning of the tenth-grade year, the student enrolls at a member school that does not serve his area of residence.  Is this student immediately eligible at the new school?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No. The student is now a migrant student because he transferred to a school without living in that service area.  If the student had transferred back to the member school at which he began the ninth-grade, he would have been eligible.
 
n SITUATION:  A student who attended ninth and tenth grade in a non-member home school enrolls at the public school that serves his area of residence.  That school specifies that students from home schools must be tested in order for the course work to be accepted.  May this student participate in athletics before the testing is done?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No, because eligibility cannot be determined until the course work is accepted.
 
CHOICE OF PUBLIC OR PRIVATE MEMBER SCHOOLS
 
n SITUATION:  A tenth-grade student and his parents reside in the service area of School “A” and attends that school.  The parents and the student have a bona fide move into the service area of public School “B” and private School “C.”  Does the student have a choice about which school he may attend and remain eligible?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes.  When a student (attending any member school) moves into a new service area, he may choose to attend the public school that serves his new area of residence, or a private school that has been assigned his new area of residence.
 
n SITUATION:  A tenth-grade student at member private School “C” resides in the service area of public School “A,” and then moves into the service area of public School “B,” which is still in the service area of School “C.”  Does the student have a choice in attending public School “B” or selecting a new private school that includes the service area of School “B” in its service area?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes.  When a student (attending any member school) moves into a new service area, he may choose to attend the public school that serves his new area of residence, or any private school that has been assigned his new area of residence.
 
n SITUATION:  A twelfth-grade student has been at a member school since entering the ninth-grade.  When his parents move into the service area of another school, the student wants to stay at his original school.  May he remain at the school and retain his eligibility?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes.  Once a student has established eligibility at a school, he retains eligibility at that school as long as he is allowed by the local board of education to attend that school, and as long as he meets academic requirements.
 
MIGRANT STUDENT RULE
 
n SITUATION:  A student enrolls in School “A,” is certified eligible, and participates in athletic contests.  Then it is discovered that the student's parents do not live in the service area of School “A.”  After the school forfeits all contests it won when the student played, what is the status of this student's eligibility if:
 (a) the student remains in School “A,” and the parents do not move into the service area of School “A?”
 (b) The student remains in School “A,” and the parents move into the service area of School “A?”
 (c) the student transfers to the school that serves his area of residence?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  
 (a) The student is ineligible for a period of one (1) year from the date of entry to School “A.”
 (b) The student becomes eligible on the date the parents move into the service area of School “A.”
 (c) The student is ineligible for one (1) year from the date of entry to the school of his service area.
 
n SITUATION:  A student who has been living with his mother in another state moves in with his grandparents and enters a member school.  The grandparents go to a Probate Court and get a Letter of Temporary Guardianship.  Will this student be eligible for interscholastic activities?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No. This student is considered a migrant student. The student may practice and may play in sub-varsity contests if academic requirements are met, but he will be ineligible for varsity competition for one calendar year.  Guardianship is not recognized for eligibility purposes.
 
n SITUATION:  A school system has a policy that the children of teachers may attend the school where the parent teaches regardless of where the family lives. The high school hired a teacher, who has a tenth-grade student, and the family lives outside the service area of that school.  If the student attends the school where the parent teaches, will he be immediately eligible?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes, as long as the parent is a certified teacher or administrator at the receiving school.
 
n SITUATION:  A ninth-grade student transfers from one member school to another member school without a bona fide move.  May he participate on the JV basketball team if he has met all academic requirements?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes. The student is a migrant student and migrant students may practice and may play on a sub-varsity team during the year that he is ineligible for varsity competition.
 
SUSPENDED OR EXPELLED STUDENT
 
n SITUATION:  A student is expelled from a member private school for behavioral problems.  The student and his parents move to a different service area and the student enrolls in a member public school.  Is the student eligible to participate in interscholastic activities?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No.  The student will not be eligible until the time frame of the suspension at the first school is complete or one calendar year – whichever is shorter.
 
UNFINISHED HOME
 
n SITUATION: A family has purchased a new home in a school district other than the one where the student has been attending school.  However, the new home will not be available for occupancy until six weeks after the start of the semester.  In the meantime, the new local board of education allows the student to begin attendance in anticipation of the move when the home is available.  When will the student be eligible at the new school?
 
 INTERPRETATION: The student will be eligible immediately upon the date the family physically occupies the residence in the new district.
 
n SITUATION: A family has purchased a new home in a school district other than the one where the student has been attending school.  However, the new home will not be available for occupancy until six weeks after the start of the semester. The parents desire the student to begin and complete the semester at the original school, before transferring to the new school. How will this affect the student's eligibility?
 
 INTERPRETATION: The GHSA By-Laws permit students to complete the current semester in a given district if their parents move from that district after school has commenced.  Therefore, the student in this case may remain in his original district for the remainder of the semester and be eligible in respect to residence.  If the student continues to attend school in that district in the succeeding semesters, he will continue eligibility. If he begins the next semester and then decides to transfer to the school in his area of residence, he would be ineligible for varsity competition for one (1) year.
 
RECRUITING/UNDUE INFLUENCE
 
n SITUATION: A member school schedules a social event for any eighth grade student and his/her family to showcase the school’s athletic program and facilities. Is this legal?
 
 INTERPRETATION: No, that would be a violation of the recruiting/undue influence rules.
 
n QUESTION: Is it possible for a member school to be held responsible if someone in that school’s community initiates a contact for a student to transfer for athletic purposes?
 
 ANSWER: If the individual making the contact meets the definition of a “booster” as found in By-law 1.73, the member school may be held accountable.
 
n SITUATION:  A coach at a GHSA school: (a) coaches a club soccer team; (b) coaches in an all-star football game; (c) gives personal softball pitching lessons. A student interacts with the coach in one of the settings listed above, and then transfers with a bona fide move to the school where the coach is employed. Is the student eligible?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No.   Each of these situations falls under the GHSA rules for recruiting/undue influence.
 
n SITUATION:  A coach leaves School A and takes a coaching position at School B.  A student who played for the coach at School A transfers to School B with a bona fide move after the coach changes jobs.  Is the student eligible?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No.   The situation falls under the GHSA rules for recruiting/undue influence.
 
AMATEUR STATUS AND AWARDS
 
n SITUATION: A team wins the state championship and school and community people put on a banquet honoring this accomplishment.  The athletes and their parents are provided the meal at no expense, and the following awards are given:
 (a) a gift certificate for a dinner at a local restaurant to be used by the individual player at his convenience
 (b) a jacket, sweater, and/or shoes in school colors with lettering that proclaims the state championship
 (c) a plaque commemorating the accomplishment
 Is this legal?
 
 INTERPRETATION: The free meal at the banquet is not a violation, nor is the plaque that was given.  All other items must fit under the $250 per student, per year allowance. NOTE: A school may provide one jacket to each athlete who letters in the student’s high school career.
 
n SITUATION:  A school wins the state championship and desires for the players to have a commemorative award.  May the school buy rings for the players?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes, symbolic awards (i.e., non-cash) presented for winning or placing in GHSA competitions are limited to $250.00 per year, per student in the aggregate, paid for by the local school.
 
n SITUATION:  A student who wins a non-GHSA tennis tournament is offered (a) a cash prize of $100.00, or (b) a merchandise certificate worth $250.00 in tennis equipment and/or apparel. How will these awards affect the student’s amateur status?
 
 RULING: The GHSA follows the rules of the United States Tennis Association. USTA rules forbid the acceptance of money but do allow the acceptance of merchandise not to exceed $250.00.
 
n SITUATION:  A student wins her flight in a non-GHSA golf tournament and is offered (a) a cash prize of $150.00, or (b) a set of irons valued at $600.00. How will these awards affect the student’s amateur status?
 
 RULING: The GHSA follows the rules of the United States Golf Association.  USGA rules forbid the acceptance of money, but do allow the acceptance of merchandise not to exceed $750.00.
 
 
2.10 - SCHOOL MEMBERSHIP TO GEORGIA HIGH SCHOOL ASSOCIATION
 
2.11 The GHSA is a voluntary association available to any Georgia high school, grades 9-12, that has been authorized to seek membership by the local board of education or similar governing body of control.
 (a) Member schools agree to conform to the Constitution and By-Laws of the GHSA.
 (b) Member schools agree to conform to the rules of the region organizations to which they are assigned.
 (c) Should a conflict arise between state rules and region rules, the state rules always take precedent.
 
2.12 Procedure for Membership:
 (a) The local board of education or similar governing body of control must adopt a resolution authorizing membership for the high school.
 (b) Membership is continued through the original resolution as long as the school is in good standing with the GHSA.
 (c) April 1 preceding the reclassification alignment process is the deadline date for new and existing private schools to join the GHSA for the next reclassification period.  Newly established public schools will have a deadline date of April 1 to join the GHSA for the upcoming school year.  No private school with an actual numerical enrollment of less than 150 students in grades 9 through 12 will be admitted to the GHSA.
 (d) Converted charter schools whose attendance zones and eligibility requirements do not change retain their membership in the GHSA.  Converted charter schools or startup charter schools must apply for membership in the GHSA.
 
2.13 Dues for Membership:
 (a) The amount of the dues is set annually by the Executive Committee of the GHSA, and includes a portion of the cost of catastrophic insurance.
  (1) Dues must be paid prior to October 15 of each year.
  (2) Schools failing to meet the dues-payment deadline are not eligible to participate in any contest until membership dues are paid.
 (b) Dues are prorated according to the school’s classification.  
  NOTE:  Schools with a total enrollment of less than 50 students are assessed their insurance fees according to the actual number of participants.
 (c) The Dues schedule is as follows:

CLASSIFICATION PAID BY OCTOBER 15 PAID AFTER OCTOBER 15
AAAAAA $985.00 $1,085.00
AAAAA $825.00 $925.00
AAAA $665.00 $765.00       
AAA $585.00 $685.00  
 AA $450.00 $550.00  
 A $340.00 $440.00
 
2.14 If a school or school system initiates litigation against the association and the court rules in favor of the association, the school or school system shall be responsible for paying all court costs and attorneys’ fees.
 
2.15 If the association conducts an investigation of a member school in reference to a possible violation of association rules and the member school is found to be in violation, the school shall be assessed the cost of the investigation in addition to any fines.
 
2.16 Playing a Non-Region Schedule: A school may choose to play a non-region schedule in football, basketball, and/or baseball, and this choice is in effect for the entire reclassification period.
 (a) A school playing a non-region schedule may not participate in post-season competition.
 (b) Results of games with a school playing a non-region schedule may not be used in region standings.
 
2.17 Region and Area Divisions: A classification in any sport will be considered Regionalized when a majority of the schools (with a minimum of 5) in all regions participate in that sport. In sports where all classifications are not regionalized, the classes may be divided into area alignments, and two or more classifications may be combined.
 
2.20 - ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES
 
2.21 The administrative head of each school shall have on file in the school office:
 (a) a certificate of an annual physical examination given by a licensed medical physician, a doctor of Osteopathic medicine, nurse practitioner or a physician’s assistant indicating the student is approved for participation in athletic activities before that student may try-out, participate in practice or conditioning drills, or participate in interscholastic contests (see By-Law 1.41).
 (b) a written Emergency Action Plan for athletic practices and games. This plan must include responses to natural disasters, serious illnesses/injuries, and terroristic events, and must have the involvement of local law enforcement agencies, rescue agencies, medical doctors and hospital personnel.  
 
2.22 The administrative head of each school shall operate all interscholastic contests and activities under direct and complete control of the school administration or designated school personnel. These responsibilities are not to be delegated by the board of education, superintendent, or principal to any person or persons who are not a part of the school staff.
 
2.23 The administrative head of each school is expected to be a person who believes in fairness and honesty as evidenced by the strict adherence to all rules and regulations in regards to eligibility of contestants representing his/her school.
 
2.24 The administrative head of each school is expected to employ those persons who exemplify fairness and honesty.  Any certificated person who violates rules in regard to student eligibility, or illegal practices, or    
knowingly misleads a member school and/or the GHSA will have a report of that behavior sent to the Professional Standards Commission.
 
2.25 The administrative head of each school may submit to the GHSA Executive Committee such recommendations for the improvement of the GHSA as he/she may deem necessary.  
 (a) These recommendations must be submitted to the GHSA Office at least thirty (30) days prior to the
meeting of the Executive Committee.
 (b) A proposal brought to the Executive Committee that is denied by either a subcommittee or the full Executive Committee may not be submitted for three (3) meetings after the previous submission unless a substantive change has been made to the proposal.
 
2.26 The member institution has a responsibility to educate student-athletes, coaches, and other appropriate persons on GHSA rules and procedures that could affect them.  Further, the member school should monitor its compliance with State Association guidelines.
 
2.27 Member schools that fail to follow stated procedures and deadlines may be assessed a fine for each violation.
 
2.28 Schools that need to cancel appointments scheduled with the Hardship Committee or the Appeals Board must do so at least 24 hours before the appointment. Failure to cancel properly will result in a fine.
 
2.29 Member schools are expected to fulfill their responsibilities for a sports season once they have committed to play that sport.
 (a) If a school commits to play a sport at the region meeting that precedes the sport, or on April 1 for Area sports, and then drops out of competition before or during the season, the school will have to play a non-region schedule in that sport the next year.
 (b) If a school enters the competitive structure that qualifies it to advance in postseason competition, that school is expected to advance if it qualifies. Schools that drop out of competition after qualifying may be penalized with fines or probation.
 (c) Appeals for emergency circumstances may be filed with the Executive Director.
 
2.30 - ELIGIBILITY REPORTS FILED BY THE SCHOOL
 
2.31 Eligibility reports are required for all contestants prior to the calendar date for the first possible practice in any GHSA activity. (EXCEPTION: Eligibility reports for Literary, One-Act Play and Riflery competitions are due twenty (20) days before the first contest.)
 (a) Students are not allowed to participate in academic, athletic or literary competitions until their eligibility reports have been received and processed by the GHSA Office.
 (b) Failure to meet the eligibility deadline may lead the GHSA Executive Director to:
  (1) Assess a fine to the school that is delinquent.
  (2) Suspend the membership of a school that does not file eligibility reports.
 (c) Reports not filed properly will be returned to the school for resubmission.
 
2.32 Schools playing interscholastic contests before the filing of an eligibility report on one or more participating students may be subject to one or more of the following penalties imposed by the GHSA Executive Director:
 (a) a fine per game or contest in which one or more participants had no eligibility report filed.
 (b) forfeiture of any game in which one or more participants did not have eligibility report filed.
 (c) restriction from competition in any sport if the fines assessed are not paid within ten (10) days of notification.
 
2.33 Supplementary eligibility reports may be submitted at any time on transfer students, students coming out for the team after the initial report, and/or those students who gain eligibility at the beginning of a semester.
 
2.34 Once a student has been certified eligible by the school and has been processed by the GHSA, eligibility is assumed to be continuing, and no further eligibility report is necessary for that student during the school year unless situations occur that render the student ineligible.
 
2.35 If a student loses eligibility and regains it during the school year, a new eligibility report should be filed for that student.
 
2.36 Changes of Eligibility Records:  When a school discovers that incorrect information has been given on an eligibility report, the following procedures shall be followed:
 (a) To change the date of ninth grade entry:
  (1) Submit a new eligibility report form on which you have written “Corrected Copy” AND a certified copy of the student's transcript
  (2) NOTE:  a visiting examiner may be used to verify the data
 (b) To change the date of birth:
  (1) Submit a new eligibility report form on which you have written “Corrected Copy” AND a certified copy of the student's birth certificate
  (2) NOTE:  a visiting examiner may be used to verify the data
 (c) To correct other errors:
  (1) Submit a new eligibility report form on which you have written “Corrected Copy”
  (2) Give the date of the original eligibility submission
 
2.37 Requests to investigate a student’s eligibility in regard to the transfer rule must be filed with the GHSA office at least twenty (20) calendar days before the end of the regular season in order for any penalties to be applied before the end of the playoffs.
 
2.40 -  STUDENT RETENTION FOR INTERSCHOLASTIC ATHLETIC ACTIVITIES
 
2.41  Member schools shall prohibit participation in interscholastic activities by any student who was retained in the eighth grade for competitive purposes.  The governing body of each school system shall develop a written policy showing that the system does not allow retention for competitive purposes.
 
2.50 - QUALIFICATIONS TO COACH  
 
2.51 An athletic coach must be a professional teacher meeting the teaching requirements and be employed by only one board of education or similar governing authority within the GHSA membership, regardless of whether or not they are paid for their coaching (Exception: when all boards of education or similar governing authorities and all principals/headmasters involved sign a consent form on an annual basis he/she may coach at another school system), AND:
 (a) be employed for 20 or more hours per week on a regular basis in a professional, contracted position and must hold a teaching certificate or leadership certificate issued by the State of Georgia, OR
 (b) be employed for 20 or more hours per week on a regular basis as a JROTC instructor in the school's JROTC program, OR
 (c) be assigned as a student intern in a practice teaching situation under the guidance of a college or university teacher training program, OR
 (d) be a retired teacher teaching or supervising (NOTE: coaching meets the supervising requirement of this by-law) less than one-half time (forty hours considered full time), OR
 (e) be a certified teacher or administrator at a member school on medical leave governed by the “Family Medical Leave Act” and/or the “Georgia Teacher Maternity Leave of Absence” policy (see the GHSA web site for the required form).
 (f) If a currently certified faculty-coach at a member school loses his/her teaching position because of a reduction in force action, that school may petition the Executive Director in writing for that individual to continue to coach without going through the community coach training.
 (g) A teacher at a non-member school who is hired to be a coach at a member school must complete the GHSA Community Coach Education program and may not be a head coach. A consent form between the two schools must be completed annually.
 
2.52 Member schools may employ persons who are not professionally certificated teachers as assistant coaches in their athletic programs.  These individuals are referred to as “community coaches.”
 (a) Community Coach is defined as a person who does not have a professional-level certification, who relates in role and function to a professional and does a portion of the professional's job or tasks under the supervision of the professional, and whose decision-making authority is limited and regulated by the professional.  Community coaches are not allowed to function without the immediate supervision of an educational professional and may not function as a varsity Head Coach or be named by the school as a varsity Head Coach.
 (b) Licensed para-professionals and full-time substitute teachers must complete the GHSA Coaches Education Program and testing program to be eligible to coach.
 (c) All community coaches should be signed to a written “agreement to coach.”
  (1) They may coach for only one board of education annually, regardless of whether or not they are  paid for their services.
  (2) Community coaches may not coach the same sport at more than one school even if there are  multiple schools in the system.
 (d) All community coaches must complete the GHSA Coaches Education Training and Testing Program in “Sport First Aid” and “Principles for Coaches.”
  (1) Prospective coaches must be subject to a criminal background check before they are registered for the GHSA coaches education program.
  (2) Courses are offered at various times each school year throughout the state.
  (3) Prospective coaches are registered with the GHSA office by the school hiring them.
  (4) No community coach may do any GHSA coaching until he/she has been notified that the GHSA Coaches Education Program had been completed successfully.
 (e) It is recommended that the following priority for employment be used:
  (1) certified employees in the local system (secondary, middle, elementary, central office, etc.)
  (2) retired certificated personnel
  (3) community coaches who have completed the GHSA Coaches Education Program.
 (f) All community coaches must attend a regular GHSA rules clinic each year for any sport in which they coach beginning with their first year of service or the school will be fined.
 
2.53 GHSA member schools must register all coaches in all GHSA governed activities according to the following:
 (a) An initial directory listing of administrators and coaches must be completed and filed with the State Office by August 1 of each year. Only professionally certificated personnel are to be included on the initial directory listings.
 (b) Qualified Community Coaches are to be reported on the “School Staff Roster” on the GHSA web site. Only those persons who have successfully completed the GHSA Coaches Education Program are to be listed. NOTE: Schools must verify the successful completion of the coaches education program BEFORE community coaches are submitted to the GHSA and BEFORE any coaching activities are allowed (forms on the GHSA web site).
 (c) After August 1, schools will have occasion to add members to their coaching staff. It is the responsibility of the member school to register these additions in a timely manner, using the School Staff Roster on the GHSA web site.
 (d) Failure to comply with these procedures could result in punitive actions including, but not limited to, fines, forfeitures and other penalties assessed to the member school.
 
2.54 Every faculty coach, community coach, and student-teaching intern at a GHSA member school must complete a GHSA-sponsored rules clinic if he/she coaches the following sports:  football, softball, volleyball, riflery, cheerleading (spirit and/or competitive), basketball, lacrosse, wrestling, swimming and diving, track, baseball, golf, soccer and gymnastics. NOTE: A fine for each coach who does not complete a clinic will be assessed to the school.
 
2.55 A football coach on the payroll of one school district, but under contract to another school district for the following year, may help with spring practice at the new school if arrangements are satisfactory with both systems.
 
2.56 A person who is an active official or an assignor of officials at the high school level may not be a head coach or an assistant coach at a GHSA school in the same sport.
 
2.60 - INTERSCHOLASTIC CONTESTS AND PRACTICES  
 
2.61 All practices (team and individual) and all regular-season interscholastic contests for GHSA-member schools shall be conducted outside the school day of the participants' school.
 (a) Regional, Sectional, and/or State playoffs are exempt from this rule.
 (b) The “school day” is defined as:  that period of time between when students are required to report to school and the time of dismissal of the host school. EXCEPTION: When the host school is not in session on a given day, competitions may be scheduled earlier than normal dismissal time for that school.            
However, any school that is in session on that day may not compete in that event before the normal dismissal time of the host school.
 (c) A player who participates in a GHSA sport may not participate in practices that occur during the school day. Practice is defined as any activity that is school-initiated, organized, coordinated or supported.
 
2.62 The GHSA shall provide rules and regulations for competition among member schools for those competitive activities listed in the GHSA Constitution and By-Laws.
 (a) Member schools may play GISA Interscholastic schools only in sports currently not operating under a power rating system.
  (1) A GHSA school may schedule no more than 20% of its regular-season competitions against GISA schools.
  (2) GISA eligibility rules will be respected except that 8th-grade students may not compete in a varsity contest.
  (3) All GHSA requirements for catastrophic insurance, physical examinations and other appropriate risk management mitigations must be followed.
 (b) In situations not covered by section (a), member schools shall compete, practice or scrimmage only against other member schools or against schools who are affiliated with the State Association in their respective states. When competing internationally, member schools may compete only against school teams in that nation that are composed of students of similar ages. International exhibition competitions or scrimmages are not allowed. NOTE: When member schools compete out of state, the host state’s adaptations of NFHS playing rules will be enforced, and all GHSA by-laws regarding sportsmanship, eligibility and game times will be enforced.
 (c) Member schools are permitted to compete against non-member schools in activities not listed in the GHSA Constitution and By-Laws.
 (d) The GHSA Executive Director has the authority to approve competition between GHSA schools and private schools from states in which membership in the State Association is not allowed.  These non-member schools must meet or exceed the State Association standards in order to compete with GHSA schools.
 (e) A member school shall have no more than one varsity, one junior varsity, and one 9th grade team.
  (1) Any sub-varsity team is limited to a maximum number of games equal to 70% of the varsity allotment in that sport.  EXCEPTION:  New schools that have only 9th and 10 grades with JV teams only (no varsity) are allowed to play the number of games allowed for varsity teams.
  (2) Competition between sub-varsity and varsity teams and/or individuals at the same event is prohibited. An exception may be made by the Executive Director for schools just opening and for schools just starting a particular sport.
  (3) In the sports of Cross Country, Golf, Swimming, Tennis and Wrestling, a school may use a “split squad” at two regular season events on the same day at the varsity or sub-varsity levels. Both of the contests must be counted against the total number of contests allowed in that sport. Individual players may not exceed the total number of contests allowed at the varsity level of that sport.
  (4) Unattached Competitor: Individual athletes may participate in non-GHSA events in the sports of Cross Country, Golf, Gymnastics, Riflery, Swimming, Tennis, Track and Wrestling as long as they do not represent their school, do not wear the school uniform, and are not coached at the event, or transported to the event, by their high school coach. “House teams” made up of wrestlers from various schools competing in a GHSA event are not considered to be unattached competitors and are illegal.
  (5) No athlete will be allowed to compete in a GHSA game or contest (even in post-season play) unless accompanied by certified professional school personnel whose names have been submitted to the GHSA as coaches. Those students chaperoned by someone other than a certified professional will not be allowed to compete.
  (6) In any GHSA sport, there may be no “open” competitions or exhibition performances that extend participation beyond the three levels of competition (i.e., varsity, JV, 9th grade) mandated in this by-law. The only interscholastic contests in which results are disregarded are scrimmages as defined below.
 (f) One interscholastic scrimmage (two teams meeting head-to-head) is allowed in the sports of Baseball, Basketball, Football, Lacrosse, Soccer, Softball and Volleyball.
  (a) This scrimmage may be scheduled anytime between the beginning of practice as set by the GHSA
   and the first regular season game for each team.
  (b) This scrimmage is for varsity teams only, and shall be played with normal timing and/or scoring rules
   except as noted in individual sports sections.
  (c) Game officials must be used.
 
2.63 Written contracts are required for all football, basketball and wrestling contests, and are strongly recommended in all other interscholastic contests that are scheduled between member schools.
 (a) Contract forms can be found on the GHSA web site.
 (b) Contracts are also recommended for all sub-varsity contests.
 (c) GHSA-member schools are expected to fulfill the conditions of any game contract that has been properly executed.
  (1) Exceptions to the contract may be made with the agreement and consent of both schools.
  (2) Member schools that fail to fulfill the requirements of a scheduled event may be required to make restitution to the competing school if that school is unable to secure an opponent. The offended school shall petition the Executive Director for the desired restitution.
  (3) Schools failing to fulfill a game contract may be suspended in that sport for one (1) full calendar year or the corresponding date of the next calendar year, whichever is greater.
  (4) EXCEPTION:  The GHSA Executive Director may excuse the failure to fulfill a game contract if, in his opinion, the circumstances causing the failure were outside the control of the school officials.
 (d) All athletic events hosted by GHSA-member schools (except Cross Country, Golf, Riflery, Tennis and Track) shall be officiated at all levels of competition by officials who are members of associations that are approved by the GHSA. (Exception: situation noted in By-Law 2.95).
  (1) Officials’ associations and their assigned schools shall include the method of payment in their contract.
  (2) It is recommended that the same number of officials be used in regular-season competitions as the number used in playoff competitions in that sport.
 (e) Forfeiture and Restitution Policy
  (1) If a team does not arrive at the game site for any contest without notifying the host opponent of a late arrival, that contest will be forfeited 30 minutes after the scheduled game-time. If the second game or contest was to be played by a different team (EXAMPLE: girl/boy or JV/varsity combination events), then a decision to forfeit that game will be made 30 minutes after the scheduled beginning of the second game.
  (2) If there are to be multiple games by the same team and the team does not arrive at the game site without notifying the host opponent of a late arrival, all games will be forfeited 30 minutes after the scheduled game-time of the first contest.
   EXAMPLE: softball or baseball doubleheaders
  (3) If a school fails to show up for a game or cancels a game within four (4) hours of the scheduled starting time without an emergency condition or weather-related conditions, that school shall pay a forfeiture fee to the host school equivalent to the cost of the officials.  NOTE:  If the host school is the violating team, the fee will be paid directly to the officials association. The host school shall reimburse the visiting team(s) for mileage incurred by the visiting team(s) when this by-law is violated by the host team).
  (4) If a school fails to show up for a game or cancels within four (4) hours of the scheduled game time without emergency reasons or weather-related reasons for a second time, that school must make restitution again and must show cause to the GHSA Executive Director as to why they should not be placed on probation by the GHSA.
 (f) The minimum penalty for allowing an ineligible athlete to participate in an interscholastic contest is forfeiture of the game(s). Fines or other penalties may also be imposed. NOTE: If it is determined by the Executive Director that the school has exercised every reasonable precaution and has been deceived regarding the student’s data, any or all penalties may be set aside.
 (g) A team shall forfeit any team standing or points toward team honors when an ineligible student participates in a contest. In sports where individual titles may be won (Cross Country, Literary, Swimming and Diving, Traditional Wrestling, Gymnastics, Golf and Track), eligible individuals will keep their placements and opportunities to advance toward individual honors even if a teammate participated while ineligible.
 
2.64 Tournaments or multiple-meets, other than the Region or State elimination series must be approved (sanctioned) by the GHSA Executive Director, subject to the special conditions for athletics and/or other activities.
 (a) A GHSA-member school shall not enter a tournament which requires sanctioning until that tournament has been approved by the GHSA Executive Director.
  (1) The GHSA Executive Director may assess a fine and/or other penalties against a member school that violates the sanctioning rules.
  (2) Approval will not be granted for any tournament, meet, or other contest to qualify for and/or determine a national high school championship. The GHSA strongly discourages participation in events        
that qualify a team representing a member school for a national championship during the Summer.
  (3) Tournament participation limits are set for each sport, and they are listed in the specific sport sections in this document.
 (b) All applications for sanctioning must be submitted to the GHSA thirty (30) days prior to the tournament by a GHSA-member school.  
  NOTE:  Tournaments that require National Federation sanctioning are an exception to this rule.
 (c) The host school for all sanctioned tournaments shall pay five percent (5%) of all gross gate receipts to the GHSA within ten (10) days after the tournament.
  (1) Total gate receipts before expenses are paid equals the gross receipts.
  (2) A financial report of the event shall accompany the payment.
 (d) GHSA approval for tournaments in contiguous states is needed when there are four or more schools participating.
 (e) Approval for tournaments in Georgia is needed when:
  (1) it is a tournament involving four or more schools OR
  (2) it is a tournament in which awards are given.
 (f) Tournaments that require approval from the National Federation are:
  (1) any interstate tournament in which more than eight schools participate, and at least one participant is from a non-contiguous state OR
  (2) any interstate tournament that involves schools from more than five State High School Associations, and at least one of them does not border on the State of the sponsoring school OR
  (3) any international tournament (except competition with Canadian and Mexican high schools) OR
  (4) any interstate tournament involving two (2) or more schools which is co-sponsored by or titled in the name of an organization outside the high school community (e.g., a university, a theme park, an athletic company).
 (g) The GHSA Executive Director has the authority to approve competition between GHSA schools and private schools from states in which membership in the State Association is not allowed.  These non-member schools must meet or exceed the State Association standards in order to compete with GHSA schools.
 (h) In all sports except Football, a team (subvarsity or varsity) may play multiple games on a single calendar day in a tournament setting. NOTE: In these instances, the special “quarter/half participation rules” in basketball and soccer are waived.
 (i) For any one-day event in which more than two schools compete (i.e., a basketball showcase or some similar event), the following stipulations are in effect:
  (1) A “host school” must be designated for each game even if the games are played at neutral sites.
  (2) The host school must provide a Game Manager for that game.
  (3) The host school must schedule game officials through the local association assigned to it.
  (4) These special events will require sanctioning approval from the GHSA office.
 
2.65 Available Seating:  Member schools shall provide a seat for each ticket sold to any contest regulated by the GHSA.
 (a) An available seat is defined as twenty-four (24) inches in width.
 (b) Each school is required to make a determination of the available seats prior to the beginning of the contest.
 (c) At outdoor events, “standing room” tickets may be sold as long as they are identified as such at the time of the purchase, and as long as there are no problems with safety and security with such an arrangement.
 
2.66 Weekday Contests: Only one day and/or night preceding a school day per week may be used for a contest or activity with a starting time of 6:00 pm or later.
 (a) Regional, Sectional, and/or State playoffs are exempt from this rule.
 (b) The GHSA Executive Director has the authority to set aside this rule upon request when there are extenuating circumstances.
 (c) Teams playing any regular season contest when there are classes the next day shall be limited to a travel distance of no more than 100 miles one way as determined using the maps program at www.Yahoo.com.
 (d) No contest shall be played beyond 11:30 p.m., unless exempted under By-Law 2.93 (c2b) or by procedures found in sections of the by-laws dealing with specific sports.  A petition may by filed with the Executive Director to waive the 11:30 p.m., curfew for teams of different classifications or competitions with out-of-state teams when there are special circumstances.
 
2.67 Practice Policy for Heat and Humidity:
 (a) Schools must follow the statewide policy for conducting practices and voluntary conditioning workouts (including during the summer) in all sports during times of extremely high heat and/or humidity that will be signed by each head coach at the beginning of each season and distributed to all players and their parents or guardians. The policy shall follow modified guidelines of the American College of Sports Medicine in regard to:
  (1) The scheduling of practices at various heat/humidity levels
  (2) The ratio of workout time to time allotted for rest and hydration at various heat/humidity levels
  (3) The heat/humidity levels that will result in practice being terminated
 (b) A scientifically-approved instrument that measures the Wet Bulb Globe Temperature must be utilized at each practice to ensure that the written policy is being followed properly. WBGT readings should be taken every hour, beginning 30 minutes before the beginning of practice.
 
 
WBGT ACTIVITY GUIDELINES AND REST BREAK GUIDELINES
 
Under 82.0 Normal Activities - Provide at least three separate rest breaks each hour with a minimum
 duration of 3 minutes each during the workout.
 
82.0 - 86.9 Use discretion for intense or prolonged exercise; watch at-risk players carefully. Provide
 at least three separate rest breaks each hour with a minimum duration of 4 minutes each.
 
87.0 - 89.9 Maximum practice time is 2 hours. For Football: players are restricted to helmet, shoulder
 pads, and shorts during practice, and all protective equipment must be removed during
 conditioning activities. If the WBGT rises to this level during practice, players may continue   to work out wearing football pants without changing to shorts.  For All Sports: Provide at least   four separate rest breaks each hour with a minimum duration of 4 minutes each.
 
90.0 - 92.0 Maximum practice time is 1 hour. For Football: no protective equipment may be worn during
 practice, and there may be no conditioning activities. For All Sports: There must be 20 minutes
 of rest breaks distributed throughout the hour of practice.
 
Over 92.1 No outdoor workouts. Delay practice until a cooler WBGT level is reached.
 
 
 (c) Practices are defined as: the period of time that a participant engages in a coach-supervised, school-approved sport or conditioning-related activity. Practices are timed from the time the players report to the practice or workout area until players leave that area. If a practice is interrupted for a weather-related reason, the “clock” on that practice will stop and will begin again when the practice resumes.
 (d) Conditioning activities include such things as weight training, wind-sprints, timed runs for distance, etc., and may be a part of the practice time or included in “voluntary workouts.”
 (e) A walk-through is not a part of the practice time regulation, and may last no longer than one hour. This activity may not include conditioning activities or contact drills. No protective equipment may be worn during a walk-through, and no full-speed drills may be held.
 (f) Rest breaks may not be combined with any other type of activity and players must be given unlimited access to hydration. These breaks must be held in a “cool zone” where players are out of direct sunlight.
 
2.68 GHSA Concussion Policy: In accordance with Georgia law and national playing rules published by the NFHS, any athlete who exhibits signs, symptoms or behaviors consistent with a concussion shall be immediately removed from the practice or contest and shall not return to play until an appropriate health care professional has determined that no concussion has occurred. (NOTE: An appropriate health care professional may include: licensed physician (MD/DO) or another licensed individual under the supervision of a licensed physician, such as a nurse practitioner, physician’s assistant, or certified athletic trainer who has received training in concussion evaluation and management).
 (a) No athlete is allowed to return to a game or practice on the same day that a concussion (1) has been diagnosed OR (2) cannot be ruled out.
 (b) Any athlete diagnosed with a concussion shall be cleared medically by an appropriate health care professional prior to resuming participation in any future practice or contest. The formulation of a gradual return to play protocol shall be a part of the medical clearance.
 (c) It is mandatory that every coach in each GHSA sport (including Community Coaches, Student Teachers, and Interns) participate in a free, online course on concussion management prepared by the NFHS and available at www.nfhslearn.com at least every two years - beginning with the 2013-14 school year.
 (d) Each school will be responsible for monitoring the participation of its coaches in the concussion management course, and shall keep a record of those who participate.
 (e) Each school must distribute to every athlete and his/her parent/guardian an information sheet that includes: the dangers of concussion injuries, the signs/symptoms of concussion, and the concussion management protocol outlined in this by-law. This sheet must be signed by the parent/guardian of each athlete and a copy kept on file at the school.
 
2.69 Legal practice dates are established for each activity (see the calendar at the beginning of this publication), and schools shall not conduct or allow an illegal practice.
 (a) The beginning  of  each  GHSA school  year is designated as August 1st.
 (b) Illegal practices are defined as practices involving three or more students participating in any extracurricular activity in the presence of, or under the direct or indirect supervision of any coach of the school (including a community coach).  At any given point in time, only one (1) coach in a sport may work with up to two (2) athletes in skill-building drills.
  (1) Any practice occurring after the beginning of the school year and before the opening of the designated season is an illegal practice.
  (2) Any practice occurring after the end of the season for that team and the end of the school year for students in that school is an illegal practice.  
  (3) During the summer (i.e., between the ending of one school year and the beginning of the next) the only restrictions on practices and competition are that all activities must be strictly voluntary, and the “Dead Week” must be observed, as follows:  Schools are prohibited from participating in voluntary workouts, camps and/or clinics, weight training or competitions during the week (Sunday through Saturday) in which the Fourth of July falls each year.
  (4)  It is illegal for a team to go to a competitive or instructional camp or clinic during the school year other than in-season events designed for that team alone.
   (a)  If the event is held out of season, it would constitute an illegal practice.
   (b)  If the event is held in-season, it would involve illegal coaching.
   (c)  Boys and girls teams in the same sport are considered the same activity.
   (d)  This prohibition does not apply to the summer months.
  (5) Neither coaches, former coaches (including community coaches), nor any other school personnel shall suggest, require, or otherwise attempt to influence students to participate in or practice for a sport outside the GHSA-designated season.
  (6) The following activities are examples of illegal practices:
   (a) interscholastic scrimmages or practice competitions not in compliance with By-Law 2.62e
   (b) practices involving alumni or students who presently are not eligible at the member school at any time in the school year
   (c) practices against a non-school team at any time in the school year
   (d) practices of any kind outside the season designated by the GHSA.
  NOTE: Free Style and Greco-Roman Wrestling are considered to be the same sport as Folk Style (high school) Wrestling and are subject to GHSA rules regulating illegal practices.
  (7) Coaches are allowed to be spectators or “fellow competitors” at non-school events out of season as long as no coaching occurs.
  (8) Schools found guilty of having illegal practices will be subject to penalties that may include a fine, warning, probation, and/or suspension by the GHSA Executive Director.
 (c) A GHSA coach (certified teacher or community coach) may not coach a non-GHSA team in a competitive setting during the school year that includes any player(s) who participate in the sport he/she coaches at the member school. EXCEPTION: In a situation in which the child or step-child of the coach is the only player on a non-school team from the coach’s school, the coach would be exempted from this rule.
 
2.70 - SPORTSMANSHIP
 
2.71 GHSA-member schools are required to conduct all relationships with other schools in a spirit of good sportsmanship.
 (a) It shall be the responsibility of a member school to use every means at its disposal to impress upon faculty, students, team members, coaches, and spectators the values of sportsmanship in preparation for the management of interscholastic contests. Contest officials have the authority to have any and all individuals removed from the confines of the contest whose behavior has become a distraction and/or hindrance to the administration of the event. This may include, but is not limited to, verbal and visual gestures.
 (b) The Executive Director shall have the authority to assess penalties against schools and/or coaches for conduct unbecoming a professional educator or coach committed by coaches or other school personnel at GHSA events. Penalties against schools may include fines, probation or suspensions; and penalties against coaches and other school personnel may include suspension from GHSA events.
 (c) It shall be the responsibility of the home or host school to take the following precautions at all interscholastic athletic events:
  (1) take proper steps and precautions to insure crowd and spectator control, including having an administrator (or designee) from the host school to function as “game manager” at all GHSA sanctioned events. EXCEPTIONS: Golf and Tennis
  (2) take steps to insure the comfort and security of all players, coaches, and officials
  (3) have in place sufficient security personnel to handle any crowd-control problems that might reasonably be expected.
  (4) security escorts must be provided to game officials by the host school at all GHSA sanctioned contests, before, during and following the contest - including to their vehicles.
  (5) provide a safe and secure changing area for contest officials, free from traffic by school staff, students and spectators.
 (d) Each school must develop a plan to handle fight situations that may occur during an athletic contest.
  (1) Attention must be given to keeping substitutes in the bench areas throughout the fight, and to keeping spectators away from the competitive area.
  (2) Schools whose substitutes leave the bench area to go to the area of a fight will be fined by the GHSA Executive Director.
  (3) All players who are involved in a fight and any substitutes who leave the bench area during a fight or potential fight and are ejected from the current contest, will be subject to the sit-out rule.
 (e) Players and coaches are expected to exhibit good sportsmanship before and after a contest, even if the game officials do not have jurisdiction. Behaviors such as taunting, fighting, etc., are forbidden.
 (f) No coach may remove his/her team from competition before the end of the contest unless it is done in accordance with the playing rules of that sport.
 
2.72 Any player, coach, or team attendant who is ejected from a GHSA contest shall be suspended from  all levels of competition (i.e., varsity or sub-varsity) in that sport or activity (regular season or playoffs) until the period of suspension has expired.  
 (a) Ejections are based on judgment calls by an official and are not reviewable or reversible.
 (b) A coach shall have no role nor be in attendance at pre-contest  warm-ups or activities, and shall not be in attendance at contests until the period of suspension has expired.
 (c) A player or team attendant may not be on the competitive area nor in the team bench area during any contest until the period of suspension has expired.
 (d) The period of suspension resulting from an ejection will expire as follows:
  (1) Football: after the individual has been withheld from the next-scheduled game at the level at which the ejection occurred (and all contests at any other level).
  (2) Soccer:
   (a) One-Game Sit-out:
    1. Two yellow cards in the same game
    2. Deliberate handball to prevent a goal
    3. Red card for a foul on a player moving toward his goal in a scoring situation
   (b) Two-Game Sit-out with Red Card for any of the following: taunting, violent conduct, serious foul play, spitting on another person, foul or abusive language, leaving the bench area for a fight situation.
  (3) Lacrosse players who are ejected will sit out as follows:
   (a) BOYS:  Any player ejected for the accumulation of personal foul penalty time will sit out the next scheduled match. Any player or coach ejected for unsportsmanlike behavior or violent conduct will sit out the next two matches.
  (5) All Other Activities:  after the individual has been withheld from the next two (2) scheduled contests at the level at which the ejection occurred.
 (e) To satisfy the penalty of the sit-out game(s), those games must have been scheduled at the time of the ejection, and must be played to completion.
 (f) When a player, coach, or team attendant has a second ejection in the same activity during a school year, that individual shall be withheld from competition for twice the time period of the normal suspension.
 (g) In the event that a player, coach, or team attendant is ejected three (3) or more times in the same activity during the school year for a sportsmanship violation, the individual will be withheld from competition until:
  (1) The member school presents a written response to the circumstances involved in that individual's unsportsmanlike behavior, AND
  (2) The GHSA Executive Director establishes a penalty which may include suspension in all GHSA activities for up to twelve (12) months.
  (3) Penalties imposed by the GHSA Executive Director may be appealed as described under Section 9 of Article IV, in the GHSA Constitution.
 (h) If the ejection occurs in the last game of the season, the penalty carries over to the first game of the next season. If the student is a senior, the penalty carries over to the next sport in which the student participates.
 (i) When a coach is ejected, his/her school will be fined. Coaches who have been ejected twice from competition within a school year shall have the fine tripled or must attend a Sportsmanship Class.
 (j) When a player or coach is ejected from a pre-season scrimmage (i.e., a practice game) in any sport, the school shall be fined a minimum of $250 and there will be no sit-out penalties imposed.
 (k) Game Incident Reports are due within 24 hours of the contest, and are to be submitted via the GHSA electronic reporting program.
 
2.73 Any student who intentionally injures or intentionally attempts to injure another student, coach, official, spectator, or other person immediately before, during, or immediately after any GHSA-sponsored activity, may be declared ineligible to participate in future GHSA activities by the GHSA Executive Director.  NOTE:  The notice, hearing, and appellate procedures set forth in the GHSA Constitution shall be applicable to such rulings.
 
2.74 Coaches, administrators, or players are not to make comments to the media that are critical of officials and/or their calls in a game.  Penalties that could be imposed by the GHSA Executive Director include fines and/or suspensions.
 
2.75 The use of fireworks at any GHSA-approved event shall be in strict compliance with the licensing and application procedures of Georgia law and under permit of the probate court in which the event is held.
 
2.76 The officials’ dressing area is “off limits” to school staff, students and spectators one hour prior to game time, during the duration of the contest, and until the contest officials depart the facility.
 
2.77 Unsporting acts committed by players and/or coaches after the expiration of the contest will be handled as follows:
 (a) If the inappropriate behavior occurs while the officials have jurisdiction, the official may eject the coach or player and published penalties for ejections will apply. Additional penalties may also be imposed by the Executive Director.
 (b) If the inappropriate behavior occurs after the officials’ jurisdiction has ended, and the officials witness the behavior, a Game Report should be filed with the GHSA office and administrative penalties will be assessed against the school of the guilty parties by the Executive Director.
 
2.80 - MEDIA AND FILMING REGULATIONS
 
2.81 The host or home school has the right to determine whether or not its regular-season activities may be broadcast, televised, webcast, tape recorded, filmed or photographed for any “commercial” purposes.
 (a) Either school involved in the event shall have the right to video tape the event and to copy said tape, but no third party shall have that right, not even the videographer.
 (b) A visiting school desiring to bring broadcasting personnel must obtain permission to do so from the host school prior to the date of the activity or contest.
 (c) The host school must execute a written contract with the broadcast entity that complies with the GHSA rules and regulations for broadcasting.
 
2.82 The region has the right to determine whether or not region tournament (post regular-season) events may be broadcast, televised, webcast, tape recorded, filmed or photographed for any “commercial” purposes.
 (a) The region should set and assess any fees charged for broadcasting or telecasting region tournament contests or events.
 (b) The region must execute a written contract with the broadcast entity that complies with the GHSA rules and regulations for broadcasting.
 
2.83 The GHSA rules and regulations for Regular Season and Region Tournament broadcasting are as follows:
 (a) The host school shall have the right to approve the amount of space used and the placement of broadcast equipment.
 (b) The host school (for regular-season events), or the region (for region tournaments) shall be entitled to all revenue from the sale of broadcasting rights unless the contract specifies otherwise.
 (c) Advertising utilized during the broadcast shall not include alcohol or tobacco products.
 (d) Commercial announcements shall not occur during playing time.
 (e) Announcers shall not criticize coaches, officials, or schools, and shall be fair and impartial in their descriptions.
 (f) The copyright privileges for Regular-Season events belong to and shall remain the property of the host school.
 (g) The copyright privileges for Region Tournament events belong to and shall remain the property of the region.
 
2.84 GHSA Media rules and regulations for State Playoff events:
 (a) Broadcast rights and copyright privileges to all state playoff events (i.e., after region winners have been determined) belong to the Georgia High School Association, and the GHSA has the right to determine if any of these events may be broadcast, televised, webcast, tape recorded, filmed or photographed for any “commercial” purposes.  NOTE: Participating schools may NOT sell tapes of state playoff events or provide copies of tapes to third parties for resale without written consent from the GHSA office.
 (b) The GHSA shall grant media access at all state playoff events to properly identified representatives of newspapers, radio stations (with broadcast contract) and television outlets ONLY. Proper identification is interpreted to mean an identification card given by the media outlet, or written documentation on the letterhead of the media outlet specifying that the bearer is working for that outlet at the GHSA event.
 (c) Any media entity wishing to broadcast or telecast (including Internet reproduction) any state playoff event must execute a written contract with the GHSA for that event. Contact the GHSA office for a contract, which shall contain specific rules and requirements.
 (d) Broadcast fees are listed in a chart that follows. The fees are “per event” except for football, basketball and soccer, which are per game. NOTE: a baseball playoff series is one event; a softball tournament is one event.
 (e) Television and Video Webcast rights and fees must be negotiated with the GHSA office on a case-by-case basis, except for those stations or schools having long-term contracts with the GHSA.
 (f) Video production for authorized school “coach’s shows” are exempt from these rules and fees.
 
2.85 Radio, Audio Internet Broadcast Fees for State Playoff events: Fees are based on the size of the market. Levels are determined as follows - Level 3 = 50,000 population and higher; Level 2 = 25,000 to 49,999; Level 1 = Under 25,000 population. Fees for each level are listed below. NOTE: These fees are for radio and audio only Internet webcasts. Video webcast fees must be negotiated on a case-by-case basis with the GHSA office.
 
Market Size Football Basketball Baseball/Softball Other Events
Level 3  $225/game $125/game $150/event $50/event
Level 2  $175/game $100/game $100/event $50/event
Level 1  $125/game $75/game $75/event $50/event
 
2.86 Television stations or other broadcast entities shall have the right to film portions of GHSA state playoff events in order to air selected highlights in any bona fide newscast. “Bona fide newscast” is defined as a half-hour or hour program that is regularly scheduled and includes news, weather and sports. Entertainment and commercial uses of highlights are not considered bona fide newscasts and are prohibited. Highlights may not exceed one minute per contest, or two minutes total running time in any single newscast without the consent of the GHSA. Highlights may be used, subject to the above guidelines, up to 72 hours after the event. NOTE: Members of the working press shall be allowed to use digital video cameras at GHSA state playoff events as long as such cameras are being used to obtain still images or video highlights as defined in this By-Law. Site administration shall have the authority to prevent use of such video equipment if it is determined that a video tape of a substantial portion of the event is being made.
 
2.87 FLASH PHOTOGRAPHY: Flash photography is prohibited at all indoor GHSA state playoff events unless permission is obtained from the GHSA office on a case-by-case basis. Flash photography at outdoor GHSA state playoff events is at the discretion of the onsite game officials.
 
2.88 Parents and/or fans connected with a member school will be allowed to use video or still cameras to tape or photograph GHSA state playoff events in which that member school is participating under the following conditions (Exception: One Act Play and Cheerleading restrictions will remain in place):
 (a) The cameras must be hand-held and their use cannot interfere with another fan’s view of the event. Site administrators shall have the authority to halt photography if, in their opinion, this rule is being violated.
 (b) The tapes/photos must be for personal use only and cannot be used for scouting purposes, given to other schools for scouting purposes, used for any commercial purpose, or sold for profit. Violation of this rule by a member school will result in penalties from the Executive Director including a fine.
 (c) Anyone else filming or photographing GHSA state playoff events for commercial purposes must have approval of the Executive Director.
 
2.90 - REGULATIONS OF COMPETITIONS
 
2.91 Sunday Competition:  Sunday competition is prohibited for GHSA regular season or playoff contests.  Sunday practices are regulated by local school policy.
 
2.92 Contest Rules:  All athletic and literary competitions are to be played according to the rules published by the National Federation of State High School Associations, using officially-dressed officials who are registered with the GHSA or another State Association.
 (a) Exception:  Tennis is played according to the rules of USTA.
 (b) Exception:  Golf is played according to the rules of the USGA.
 (c) Exception: Riflery is conducted according to the rules of National Standard Three-Position Air Rifle Rules.
 (d) Exception:  Girls Lacrosse is conducted according to the rules of US Lacrosse.
 NOTE:  The National Federation prohibits the use of video tape to review an official’s decision.
 
2.93 Interrupted Games:  Any GHSA competition may be interrupted due to human, mechanical, or natural causes when it is necessary to protect the safety of players and spectators. The Executive Director shall have the authority to postpone GHSA events and to direct the procedure for rescheduling when deemed necessary.
 (a) The GHSA requires lightning detectors at all outdoor athletic activities.
  (1) When a lightning detector indicates a dangerous situation, the game manager will notify the head official. At that point, the official will suspend play and all participants will go to a place of safety (NOTE: If officials spot lightning before being notified, they may suspend play).
  (2) When the detector indicates that it is safe to resume play, the contest may resume in accordance with procedures published in the NFHS Rules Book.
 (b) Postponed games are games that are terminated before they actually begin because of weather problems, emergency situations, or mechanical failures.
  (1) The host school should notify the opposing team and officials as early as possible when a contest is postponed.
  (2) The host school is responsible for determining whether an event is to be postponed until the time that game rules turn that responsibility over to game officials except when there is a written contract for that game. When there is a contract, there must be an agreement between the competing schools about the postponement.
  (3) School personnel will agree on the rescheduling of the contest.
(c) Suspended and/or Terminated Games - When game officials suspend a game due to weather issues, the following procedures are in place:
(1) For all Baseball, Softball, Football and Soccer contests involving teams of different classifications, there will be up to a two-hour delay (cumulative) before the contest will be terminated.  (See the Baseball and Softball Sections to see the procedures involved with terminated games.)
(a) If the Football or Soccer contest is terminated before it has reached the halfway point, the contest is declared a “no contest.”
(b) If the Football or Soccer contest is terminated after it has reached the halfway point, the score at the point of termination is final.
(2) For Football, Lacrosse and Soccer contests involving teams of the same classification, all contests will be played to completion.
(a) There will be no mandatory two-hour delay.
(b) The 11:30 curfew will be waived.
(c) Administrators from the competing schools may agree to postpone the contest and resume competition at the point of interruption at a later time.
(d) The team that is behind may choose not to resume the contest at a later date.
(3) Golf and Tennis procedures will be dictated by USGA and USTA rules.
(4) Cross Country and Track and Field will not use the two-hour delay rule.
 (d) Paying Officials in shortened/postponed games:
  (1) In the event a scheduled contest cannot be started due to weather-related conditions, officials who have arrived at the contest site will be paid one-half the contest fee in addition to the travel allowance.
  (2) If a game is interrupted by weather or darkness before it becomes a completed game, the officials will be paid one-half the regular game fee.
  (3) If a game is an official game at the point of interruption, the officials will be paid full fees.
  (4) Beyond these conditions, no officials group(s) may hold the schools responsible for weather-related postponements.
 
2.94 All championship contests that end in a tie will have that tie resolved by means of the procedures that are used to resolve ties in preceding rounds of the playoffs.
 
2.95 Absence of Officials:  In the unlikely event that game officials do not arrive for a contest, both schools should agree on one of the following procedures:
 (a) Delay the game until a new set of officials can arrive
 (b) Agree to play the game on another date except a Sunday
 (c) Use registered officials who might be in attendance at the contest
 (d) Use coaches or school personnel from both schools
 (e) Use formerly registered officials who might be in attendance at the contest.
 
2.96 All Star Teams:  
 (a) In accordance with state law, member schools shall not permit their teams or players to participate in “Bowl” or “All Star” games during the GHSA regular season or during GHSA playoffs. Players selected to participate in out-of-season all-star games must adhere to GHSA amateur standing rules, and to NCAA regulations regarding all-star games.
 (b) The GHSA is not involved in either sanctioning All Star games or overseeing the selection process.
 
2.97 Admission Fees for State Playoff Contests are set by the GHSA and are published in the various sports sections of the by-laws.  
 (a) “Babies in arms” are admitted free of charge to all events in the company of a ticket or pass holder.  
 (b) Membership identification cards from the Georgia Athletic Officials Association will be honored like a GHSA pass at all GHSA events. A picture ID is also necessary to use this card.
 (c) There is no admission fee for Golf, Tennis, Riflery, Literary or One Act Play.
 (d) College and University coaches may attend GHSA playoff contests free of charge with proper ID.
 
2.98 Auxiliary personnel such as ballboys/girls or batboy/girls at all State playoff games must be at least 12 years of age.
 
2.98 Artificial noisemakers are allowed at outdoor events with the exception of air horns, whistles, or other similar devices that simulate the sounds of clock horns or officials’ whistles. At any time that a national playing rule prohibits artificial noisemakers in a sport, that rule will supercede this by-law.
 
 
BY-LAW 2.40 - STUDENT RETENTION FOR ATHLETIC ACTIVITIES
 
n SITUATION:  A student is retained in the 8th grade until January because; (a) he did not pass the promotion test until the fall semester, or (b) his parents did not feel he was ready for high school in August.  How will affect the student’s GHSA eligibility?
 
 RULING:   Students who are not admitted to the ninth grade in the fall because they did not pass a promotion test may have eligibility granted in January if the high school files a copy of the school system’s promotion policy and a copy of the student’s test scores.  If the retention was for any other reason, the filing process is outlined in by-law 2.41. Regardless of the reason for the retention, the student’s 8-semester calendar to participate in GHSA activities begins with the January entrance if the retention is approved by the GHSA.
 
BY-LAW 2.50 - QUALIFICATIONS TO COACH
 
n SITUATION: Are GHSA Community Coaches subject to the same regulations in regard to out-of-season coaching as coaches who are certified teachers?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes,  all coaching regulations apply to both Community Coaches and coaches who are certified teachers.
 
n SITUATION: Can an instructor at a cheerleading gym also be a Community Coach at the high school where the gym attendees are on the cheerleading team?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes.  However, as a Community Coach, the gym instructor must follow the same guidelines as a certified school coach in regard to out-of-season coaching.
 
n SITUATION: Can a gym instructor, who is also a Community Coach, coach an all-star team during the school year that includes one or more of his high school team members?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No.  A GHSA coach, either a certified teacher or a Community Coach, may not coach a non-GHSA team in a competitive setting during the school year that includes any player(s) who participates in the sport he coaches at the member school.
 
n SITUATION: Can the high school cheerleading team practice at the cheerleading gym where the Community Coach is an instructor during the cheerleading season?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes. The GHSA does not specify where practices may be held. However, only the GHSA Community Coach and the certified school coach may work with the team at the gym. It would be illegal coaching for any other instructor at the gym to work with the team.
 
n SITUATION: A certified teacher is hired part-time in the local school. May he be hired to coach cheerleaders?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes, if the certified person is employed for twenty (20) hours or more per week on a regular basis in a professionally contracted position, and holds a valid teaching certificate.
 
n SITUATION:  A certified teacher is employed by a public school system and desires to coach at a private school.  Is this permissible?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes, as long as the chief administrator from each school involved signs the appropriate form agreeing to such an arrangement.
 
n SITUATION:  A school system wants to use a community coach to coach Lacrosse at several schools in that system.  Is this permissible?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No.  Community coaches may not coach the same sport at more than one school.
 
n SITUATION: A licensed para-professional is hired to work full-time.  May she be hired to:  (a) be the head coach of the varsity cheerleading team, or (b) assist the varsity cheerleading coach?
 
 INTERPRETATION: If the para-professional successfully completes the GHSA training program for a community coach, that individual may be an assistant coach, but never a head coach.
 
n SITUATION:  A coach for a member school takes a year off for maternity leave.  May that coach continue to coach even though there are no teaching responsibilities?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes.
 
n SITUATION:  A basketball official who also assigns basketball officials is hired by a school as a community coach in its basketball program.  Is this permissible?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No.  A person who is an active official and/or assignor of officials at the high school level may not be a head coach or an assistant coach at a GHSA school in the same sport.
 
RETIRED TEACHER
 
n SITUATION: A teacher-coach, who has been teaching thirty (30) years, retires and is re-hired by the local school board to supervise the athletic program half-time and coach.  Is this acceptable?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes.  The retired teacher/coach may be hired up to 49% of full-time and be eligible to coach.  It is not necessary for the retiree to have duties other than coaching.
 
n QUESTION: What is the definition of “retired?”
 
 ANSWER:  An individual who draws retirement funds each month from a teacher retirement fund administered by the state, local board of education, or an independent school is a retired person.
 
BY-LAW 2.60 - INTERSCHOLASTIC CONTESTS AND PRACTICES
 
n SITUATION:  When do out-of-season practice restrictions begin?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  The beginning of the GHSA school year is August 1st.  On that date, all restrictions about camps, clinics, and participation of coaches go into effect.
 
n SITUATION: A student participates in a Fall baseball league offered in the community (while school is in session), and the high school coaches assists with the practices of this team.
 
 INTERPRETATION: This is a violation of GHSA rules for coaching out-of-season.
 
n SITUATION: May a school open its gym during the school year for students to participate in basketball, volleyball, or wrestling outside the sport seasons for these activities, and may students on those school teams participate?
 
 INTERPRETATION: The gym may be open for all students in the school, and students involved in the sports mentioned may participate, but no coach in that sport may be present during these times.
 
n SITUATION: May a faculty member officiate basketball pick up games before or after school outside of the published basketball season?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes, as long as the faculty member is not a basketball coach at that school.
 
n SITUATION: May a coach in any extracurricular activity conduct voluntary, individual instruction with a student outside a team or competitive setting and outside the designated season for that activity?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes, even if the instruction is in the activity that the coach coaches during the designated activity season as long as the instruction is voluntary and is outside a team or competitive setting.  At any     
given point in time, only one coach in a particular sport may be working with one or two athletes in skill-building drills.
 
n SITUATION:  A cheerleading coach desires to bring in a representative of a national cheer organization to hold a clinic for the cheerleaders:  (a)  during the season, or (b) just after Spring try-outs.  Is this legal?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  This is a violation in either case.  In (a), the violation is for illegal coaching; in (b), the violation is for out-of-season practice. Such a clinic is legal during the Summer.
 
n SITUATION: May a faculty member organize, but not require, a voluntary out-of-season weight-lifting program?
 
 INTERPRETATION: Yes, but students must not be required to attend as a requirement for making the team.  Coaches shall use caution not to suggest that participation in such a program is mandatory, or that their failure to participate could adversely affect their opportunity to make the school team.  Such weight-lifting program must be open to all students in the school, and physical examinations for each participant must be on file at the school.  The program shall not be sport-specific.
 
n SITUATION:  A softball coach is asked to coach a traveling team that plays its schedule in the Spring and Summer months.  There is one player from the coach's school team on the traveling team.  May the coach accept the duty without violating GHSA rules?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  If the coach coached the traveling team before school was out for the students, there would be a violation.  There is no violation during the Summer.
 
n SITUATION:  A GHSA wrestling coach wants to take a group of his wrestlers to a “Free Style” tournament during the month of April, is this legal?
 
 RULING:  No.  Wrestling is wrestling regardless of whether it is “folk style,” “free style,” or Greco-Roman style. GHSA out-of-season practice rules are in effect for all types of wrestling.
 
n SITUATION:  A certified teacher who coaches at a member school gives instruction and/or coaches in a non-school Summer program that continues into Fall semester. What are the restrictions on the coach?
 
 INTERPRETATION: The Summer activity is unrestricted as long as the students’ participation is voluntary. After the GHSA school year begins in the Fall, the following conditions must be met:
 (a) If the students are in the school where the teacher coaches, no more than two can meet with the coach in skill-building drills at any point in time out of season.
 (b) If the student is from a school other than the one at which the teacher coaches, the student must voluntarily attend any instruction session or competition with the Summer activity without any direct or indirect influence from the school the student attends.
 (c) If any student transfers to the school where the teacher coaches, it would be prima facie evidence of undue influence and penalties could result. NOTE: This interpretation also applies to Community Coaches.
 
n SITUATION: May a basketball team have a scrimmage game against a team of the alumni or of the faculty of that school for fund-raising purposes?
 
  INTERPRETATION: No, all participants in a practice must be eligible students currently enrolled in the school. This would be a violation in-season or out-of-season.
 
n SITUATION:  May a school soccer team scrimmage a local recreation soccer team?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No, all participants in a practice must be eligible students currently enrolled in the school. Interscholastic scrimmages are allowed in certain sports as long as both teams are properly sanctioned high school teams.
 
n SITUATION:  At an invitational golf tournament, the host school ends its school day at 3:15 p.m. Other schools participating end their school days at times ranging from 2:30 to 3:45. What is the earliest this tournament may begin?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  3:15 – The GHSA rule is that regular season competitions may not begin before school is out for the host school.
 
n SITUATION:  A school has a teacher’s workday on a Friday, and the students are not in school.  May the school host a golf tournament that begins at 10:00 a.m., that day?
 
 RULING:  Yes.  The golf tournament may be scheduled at that time, and any schools that are also not in session that day may participate.  If a team’s school is in session, they may not participate until the normal dismissal time of the host school.
 
n SITUATION:  A student takes three courses that earn three (3) units and is finished with those classes by 12:30 p.m., each day.  His school declares its school day to run from 7:45 a.m., to 3:15 p.m.  May the student go to personal golf lessons and/or practices at 1:00 p.m., during the school’s golf season?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes. As long as the practice session or lesson is NOT school-initiated, organized, coordinated or supported in any way, then the student is free to participate in an individual practice or lesson-taking session under By-Law 2.61 (c).      
 
BY-LAW 2.70 - SPORTSMANSHIP
 
n SITUATION:  A baseball coach is ejected on Friday, and sits out the next scheduled game on Monday. The Monday game is called because of rain in the third inning.  Does this game satisfy the “sit-out rule?”
 
 INTERPRETATION:  No, since the game was called before it was considered a completed game, the coach may not count it as a sit-out game.
 
n SITUATION:  A school has several players and most of its substitutes on its baseball team ejected for a fighting incident.  At the time of the next scheduled game, the school does not have enough players to field a team, and they forfeit to their opponent.  Does this satisfy one game of the sit-out rule?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  Yes.  The acceptance of a loss in a forfeiture is equated to playing a game to its completion.
 
n SITUTATION:  A football coach, who works with both the junior varsity and the varsity squads, is ejected from a JV game on Thursday afternoon.  What are the conditions for his “sit-out” game?
 
 INTERPRETATION:  The coach must sit out the next game at the level at which he was ejected and any games in between.  In this case, the coach could not coach at the varsity game on Friday nor at the next scheduled JV game.
 
 
3.10 - REGION AUTHORITY
 
Each region, either through its governing board or in general session, shall have the authority to:
 
3.11 Make rules, which do not violate GHSA regulations, in order to successfully operate the region organization.
 
3.12 Assess mandatory membership dues in order to operate the region organization.
 
3.13 Set deadline entry dates for all region contests.
 
3.14 Oversee the operation of region contests (post regular-season) by setting:
 (a) sites for the contests
 (b) admission fees for those contests
 (c) procedures for trophies and medals
 (d) contest structure for determining a region winner, including a written tie-breaker procedure
 (e) an appeals committee to handle appeals in region playoff competitions.
  NOTE:   Decisions of the Region Appeals Committee may be appealed to the Executive Director when  it is believed that region by-laws have been violated.
 
3.15 Set and assess fees for region contest entrants to pay expenses for the contest, and to pay the expenses of region representatives to the State contest.
 
3.16 The region, not the host school, has the copyright privileges to all region tournament (post regular-season) events, and the region should set and assess any fees charged for broadcasting or telecasting region tournament contests or events.
 
3.17 Pay its Secretary-Treasurer a stipend.
 
3.20 - REGION RESPONSIBILITIES TO STATE ASSOCIATION
 
Each region, through its Secretary, shall:
3.21 Certify the winners in all region meets and/or tournaments to the GHSA Executive Director within the time limits specified in the By-Laws for each event.
 
3.22 Furnish a copy of complete region results in every region meet and/or tournament to all region schools.
 
3.23 Elect a Region Sportsmanship Award winner each school year using criteria developed by the region or criteria developed by the GHSA Sportsmanship Committee.
 
3.30 - REGION FINANCIAL OBLIGATIONS TO STATE ASSOCIATION
 
3.31 The host school of any tournament held within a region is obligated to pay five percent (5%) of the gross receipts to the GHSA Executive Director within five (5) days of the close of the tournament. NOTE: Gross receipts are defined as total income before any charges such as stadium fees, officials, etc., have been deducted.
 
3.32 Regions (or Areas) that fail to follow stated procedures and deadlines may be assessed a fine for each violation.
 
 
4.10 - GHSA ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES TO MEMBER SCHOOLS
 
4.11 The GHSA Executive Committee shall meet bi-annually to review By-Laws, policies and procedures of the Association, and to make additions, deletions, and modifications as necessary.
 (a) The GHSA Executive Committee meetings shall be conducted according to the latest edition of “Roberts Rules of Order” except:
  (1) “Pass” votes are not considered “No” votes
  (2) Any Committee member may request a roll-call vote on any question before the Committee without the requirement of a majority vote.
 (b) The GHSA Executive Committee shall consider recommendations at its bi-annual meetings from member schools and/or region secretaries that are submitted in writing to the GHSA Office at least thirty (30) days prior to the meeting.
 
4.12 The GHSA Office shall maintain an official record for all dues and fees received from any source, and shall provide for an annual audit of finances by a firm of auditors or a certified public accountant.
 
4.13 The GHSA Office shall provide all necessary forms on the GHSA web site, including the following forms from which copies are to be made to satisfy the needs of the member schools:
 (a) student eligibility forms
 (b) declarations of intent to enter GHSA activities
 (c) forms to secure sanctioning of events
 (d) contracts for events
 (e) financial statements for hosting GHSA events
 
4.14 The GHSA Office shall provide an annual calendar that notes:
 (a) the beginning and end of the season for all activities
 (b) dates for Region, Area and/or State Playoff contests and/or tournaments
 
4.20 - RECLASSIFICATION
 
4.21 Every two years, member schools will be placed in classifications for competition by one of the following procedures:
 (a) based on the FTE count for students in Grades 9-12 provided by the Georgia Department of Education for the fall semester of the second year of the current reclassification cycle
  (1) A school will be considered a single-gender school if either gender composes less than 35% of  the school population
  (2) A single-gender school shall have its FTE numbers doubled for the purpose of reclassification
 (b) based on the actual head count of students in Grades 9-12 at member private schools as determined on September 15th of the second year of the current reclassification cycle
 (c) based on projected enrollments numbers for all schools affected by the opening of a new school or the consolidation of existing schools that must be submitted by the system Superintendent no later than  September 15th of the second year of the current reclassification cycle.
  (1) Projections must be filed for the next two school years and those numbers will be averaged to get   the number by which the schools will be classified
  (2) In the event that a school’s actual enrollment in the first semester of the new reclassification cycle   exceeds the projection average by 10% or more or an existing school exceeds the projection by  5% or more, the school shall not be eligible for post-season play in any sport for the entirety of  that reclassification cycle.
  (3) Schools may appeal the loss of post-season competition to the Reclassification Committee and  then to the full Executive Committee
 (d) determined by the Reclassification Committee in accordance with the “Isolation Rule.”
 
4.22 The membership of the Association shall be divided into six (6) classifications as follows:
 (a) Schools will be placed in classifications as follows:
  (1) Largest 14-17% of schools (according to F.T.E.) - 6A
  (2) Next 14-17% - 5A
  (3) Next 14-17% - 4A
  (4) Next 14-17% - 3A
  (5) Next 14-17% - 2A
  (6) Remaining 21-22% - 1A
 (b) Schools with the same F.T.E. count separated by a classification break point will be placed in the higher classification.
 (c) Each classification will have eight (8) regions unless otherwise needed.
 (d) The Executive Director shall have the authority to work with any school that is geographically isolated within its region in order to resolve difficulties in travel and time out of class. (NOTE: Football may be exempted from the isolation policy).
  (1) An individual school shall be considered to be isolated if the average distance from that school to all other schools in the region is 100 miles or more one way.
  (2) The decision to place a school in a higher or lower classification will be based on a combination of factors that include travel distances and school population size.
  (3) If two or three schools in a region are considered to be isolated (even if the average travel distance is less than 100 miles one way), the Reclassification Committee shall be authorized to place those schools in another classification based on travel distances and school population size.
  (4) If four or more schools in a region are considered to be isolated (even if the average travel distance is less than 100 miles one way), the Reclassification Committee shall be authorized to form a subdivided region in which crossover games with the other subdivision will not be mandatory for region standing.
 
4.23 When the membership is divided into classifications as called for by the GHSA Constitution, the following process will be used:
 (a) The F.T.E. count for public schools will be averaged by the GHSA staff, and the staff will compile enrollment counts from private schools and system projections for new schools and other schools affected by that opening.
 (b) Member schools will receive a listing of student population counts for their verification.  When there is a major discrepancy between the school’s enrollment count and the count determined by the GHSA staff, the school may appeal to the Executive Director to reconsider the count.
 (c) When enrollment figures have been verified, schools will be placed in the proper classification and schools will have fourteen (14) days to file a request to play at a higher classification.
  (1) A request to move to a higher classification must be submitted over the signatures of the school’s administrative authorities (i.e., the Principal and Superintendent).
  (2) A school that transfers to a higher classification must remain in the higher classification until schools are next reclassified on a statewide basis.
 (d) The Reclassification Committee will meet in the month of November to place schools in regions and subregions. The decisions will be sent to the member schools after that meeting.
  (1) There will be a mandatory subdivision of each region containing ten (10) or more schools by the Reclassification Committee (Exception: Cheerleading).
  (2) The Reclassification Committee may subdivide a region consisting of less than ten schools if there is an extremely large geographic area within that region.
  (3) For football, the Reclassification Committee will require crossover games between teams in the subregions to guarantee a minimum of 70% of the season schedule unless there are isolation issues.
  (4) For all other sports, subdivided regions must guarantee member schools a minimum number of contests within the region equal to 50% of the season schedule unless there are isolation issues.
  (5) Any region subdivided because of geographic considerations may vote to play a full region schedule based on a two-thirds approval of all Principals in the region.
 (e) Following the initial placement of schools into regions, each new region shall meet to audit the population numbers of its member schools.
  (1) If the numbers are accurate, a written notice of approval shall be sent to the GHSA office.
  (2) If there are discrepancies in the numbers, a written notice shall be sent to the GHSA office asking the Reclassification Committee to hear the appeal at the meeting that is scheduled to hear appeals for lateral transfers.
 (f) Member schools will have fourteen (14) days to request a lateral move to another region, and that request is filed with the Reclassification Committee.
  (1) A request to have a lateral transfer must be submitted over the signatures of the school’s administrative authorities (i.e., the Principal and Superintendent).
  (2) This appeal will be heard in December and representatives from both regions shall be notified of the appeal, and may attend the meeting to voice their approval or state their concerns about such a move.
  (3) A school that receives a lateral transfer must remain in that region until schools are next reclassified on a statewide basis.
  (4) The decisions made by the Reclassification Committee will produce the alignment that will be presented to the full Executive Committee.
 (g) At a specially-called meeting in January, the Executive Committee shall hear any appeals from members who were denied lateral transfers by the Reclassification Committee.  Representatives from both regions involved in the appeal shall be notified, and may voice their approval or state their concerns about the appeal.
 (h) Member schools may begin scheduling contests for the new reclassification cycle as soon as the final vote has been taken, the membership notified, and any region subdivisions finalized.
 (i) When a majority vote is used in a subdivided region to determine scheduling and the process for selecting teams for post-season play, one or more schools may file a “minority report” with the Executive Director if the approved procedure is alleged to be unfair to all schools in the region.  If the Executive Director believes that there is unfairness with the chosen procedure, the Reclassification Committee will mediate the matter.
 
4.24 The following scheduling policy will be in effect for public schools entering the GHSA at the beginning of the second year of the reclassification cycle:
 (a) In sports where the region has two-year scheduling, the new school will not be able to play a complete region schedule at the varsity level.  In those sports, the school could play a varsity non-region schedule or a JV schedule.
 (b) In sports having year-to-year scheduling, the new school will have full membership once it has been assigned to the new region by the Reclassification Committee.
 (c) In sports that have a region tournament to advance to post-season play, the region may allow a new school to accept a low seed in the tournament even though it did not play a complete region schedule. That is a decision made by the region.
 
4.25 The Reclassification Committee will utilize the following factors in reclassification decision:
 (a) consideration of travel time and costs, plus time out of school for students.
 (b) consideration of differences in the size of school populations.
 (c) consideration of competitive balance of the schools.
 (d) consideration of equitable access to playoff slots.
 (e) consideration of rivalries and gate-receipt issues.
 
4.26 Charter schools that apply for membership after the reclassification process has been completed will be accepted as schools playing sub-varsity schedules and/or non-region varsity schedules for the next reclassification cycle.
 
4.27 The playoff format for Class A schools will be different from all other classifications:
 (a) Public and private schools will compete with each other in post-season play in the sports of Volleyball, Wrestling, Swimming & Diving, Soccer, Lacrosse, Riflery and Gymnastics.
 (b) Public and private schools will have separate championships in the sports of Football, Softball, Basketball and Baseball. The teams qualifying for post-season play out of their respective regions will be determined by the use of power ranking systems.
 (c) Public and private schools will have separate championships in the sports of Cross Country, Track & Field, Golf, Tennis, One Act Play and Literary. Teams will qualify out of Area competitions in these sports. NOTE: Each Area shall select an Area Coordinator to organize procedures.
 (d) Public and Private schools will have separate championships in Cheerleading, and all schools will be allowed to enter the Sectional competition that precedes the State Championship.
 
4.30 - STATE ASSOCIATION CONTEST/EVENT RESPONSIBILITIES
 
4.31 The GHSA shall determine the activities in which a State Tournament, Playoff, and/or Meet are to be held.
 (a) In order for a new sport to have a state competition to determine a state champion, the sport or activity must show significant growth and financial stability for a period of three (3) years.
 (b) The GHSA Executive Director will appoint a committee and a sport liaison to monitor the sport.
 (c) In order to have a State Championship in an Open Meet Event, there must be a minimum of sixteen (16) teams participating and this will be determined with the “Intent to Participate” form that is submitted to the GHSA office the preceeding school year (with the exception of coed cheerleading, which has a later deadline). Schools which submit this form and then withdraw from that sport will be fined.
 
4.32 The GHSA Executive Director shall determine and provide adequate sites for all State Tournaments, Playoffs, and/or Meets to successfully conduct the event.
 (a) Tournament sites will not be available to participating teams for practice prior to the tournaments.
 (b) The GHSA shall have full rights to the use of the GHSA logo at these events, and have full and complete rights to the sale of championship merchandise at the venue. The GHSA will also have the right to display signage of corporate partners and to restrict the use of goods in the competitive area that promote a competitor of GHSA corporate partners.
 
4.33 The GHSA shall provide team trophies for State Champions and Runners-Up, and individual medals for first and second place winners in all State activities.
 (a) The number of individual medals provided for team sports and activities is limited as follows:
  Baseball 22 Football 56 Softball 22 Wrestling (Dual) 14
  Basketball 18 Lacrosse 27 Tennis   9
  Cheerleading 20 Soccer 27 Volleyball 15
 (b) Schools may purchase additional medals if desired. The form to use to place an order for extra medals is found on the GHSA web site.
 
4.34 The GHSA shall assign field/court officials for all Area, Sectional, and State competitions (i.e., after the region winner has been determined), and the fees will be as shown in the chart in Appendix F.
 (a) Baseball  - crew of 3
 (b) Basketball - crew of 3
 (c) Cheerleading - 5 scoring judges and 2 safety judges
 (d) Football - crew of 6
 (e) Lacrosse - crew of 3
4.35 The Executive Director is authorized to modify all competition dates, times, sites, officiating requirements and other practical and logistical matters in emergency situations.
4.36 For playoff events that are held at multiple, centralized sites, when venue expenses exceed 45% of the revenue for that day at that site, the GHSA will pay the excess expenses.
4.30 -4.40 - STATE PASSES TO GHSA EVENTS
4.41 The GHSA shall issue passes for regular season and post-season events annually to:
(a) Elected or appointed Board of Education members
(b) The following school system personnel who work directly with interscholastic activities in grades
9-12:
(1) Superintendent
(2) Assistant Superintendents
(3) System-wide Athletic Directors and Assistant Athletic Directors
(c) The following school personnel of grades 9-12:
(1) Principal and Assistant Principal(s)
(2) 1 Band Director
(3) 1 Literary Coordinator
(4) 1 One Act Play Coordinator
(5) Athletic Director(s)
(6) All athletic coaches, including Community Coaches who have successfully completed the GHSA Coaches Education Program and who are registered by a member school as being utilized as a high school coach.
(7) 2 Certified Trainers employed by the school system in grades 9-12 and recommended by the Principal
(d) GHSA staff members
4.42 Lifetime Passes are available to retired persons of the teaching profession who served at least twenty (20) years in high school(s), at least the last ten (10) of which must have been served at GHSA member school(s), grades 9-12 as a:
(a) Superintendent or Assistant Superintendent AND/OR
(b) Principal or Assistant Principal AND/OR
(c) Athletic Director AND/OR
(d) Coach of a sport listed in the GHSA by-laws
(e) GHSA staff member with 20 years or more of service
(f) A Lifetime pass will be issued by special application from the school system from which the individual retired.
(1) Application should include the individual's permanent address and verification of years of service.
(2) Application forms are available upon request from the GHSA Office.
(3) Years of service to the GHSA as a Region Secretary and/or Executive Committee member shall count towards the requirements to qualify for a GHSA Lifetime Pass. NOTE: Individuals who have retired from coaching, but not from teaching, and who have met all requirements for a Lifetime Pass, may apply for the pass before retiring from the school system.
4.43 GHSA passes are non-transferrable and may not be used by persons other than the individual to whom it was issued.
(a) The individual's name shall be typed on the pass
(b) Picture Identification is required for the user of the pass at all GHSA post season events
(c) A pass that is used illegally is to be confiscated and the individual to whom the pass was issued forfeits the right to receive a pass in the future.
(d) The spouse of a coach, coaching in a State Playoff event shall be admitted to that event upon presentation of their spouse's pass and proper identification.
4.44 In the event a pass is destroyed or lost, the school administrator should notify the GHSA Office in writing, and should include the payment of $25.00 with a school check to have the pass replaced.
4.45 When a school staff member who was issued a GHSA pass leaves the position that entitles them to that pass, the pass should be voided and returned to the GHSA Office.
4.46 At any GHSA event, the host school must honor the GHSA pass that admits “the bearer and one other person.” For GHSA state playoff events, the host school shall honor only the GHSA pass, GAOA membership cards, and valid media credentials.
4.47 School resource officers and other law enforcement personnel in uniform are to be granted free admission to all GHSA events.
4.50 - CERTIFICATION OF ATHLETIC OFFICIALS
4.51 A plan for the certification of athletic officials shall be established by the GHSA office and published in the GHSA Contest Officials Handbook and Accountability Manual which includes:
(a) published procedures for registration of officials
(b) published guidelines for training officials
(c) a system for evaluating performances of officials
(d) a system of recognition of years of service by officials
4.52 The following items constitute the Athletic Officials Associations Approval Plan for the GHSA:
(a) The Executive Director of the GHSA shall determine the number of officials associations to be approved for each activity. The number of associations will be determined by:
(1) the demand for officials in that activity in that geographic area of the state
(2) the number of associations already in existence in that activity in that area
(3) the extent to which member schools’ needs are being met by existing officials associations in that activity.
(4) The assignment of officiating associations for most GHSA activities shall be the responsibility of the GHSA office.
(5) Officials’ associations must maintain minimum membership levels in order to be considered “active associations” by the GHSA in certain sports. Those numbers shall be: Baseball (15), Softball (15), Football (30), and Basketball (30).
(6) New officiating associations may be established when it can be demonstrated that the needs of member schools will be met by adding an association.
(b) The GHSA Executive Director may, at his discretion, approve additional associations utilizing the following criteria and procedure:
(1) Such associations shall make application to the GHSA requesting approval.
(2) The By-Laws of such an association shall be subject to the approval of the GHSA and must include provisions indicating that the association and its members will be subject to the rules and authority of the GHSA. A current copy of the association by-laws/constitution must be submitted to the GHSA office.
(3) An approved officials association must handle its finances through a central banking account, and should distribute IRS 1099 forms to all members. Every officiating association must have a Federal Tax Identification Number on file with the GHSA office.
(4) An approved association shall require all its members to be registered with the GHSA, and to comply with all requirements of the GHSA Policies and Procedures Manual.
(5) All approved associations must comply with all GHSA policies, procedures and reporting deadlines or be subject to fines assessed to the association by the GHSA office.
(6) Officiating associations must use the Arbiter program as the official GHSA computer program for officiating business beginning July 1, 2014.
(7) All chartered officiating associations must comply with the E-Verity program by July 1 of each calendar year.
(c) The GHSA expects every officials association to operate in a manner that does not discriminate on the basis of race, sex, color, disability, religion, national origin or age.
(d) Officials associations shall not charge member schools any administrative fees not authorized by the GHSA.
(e) All Invoices for officiating fees in all sports should be paid within 30 days of the end of the season. Failure to do so will result in a 10% late fee being charged to the member school by the officials’ association. Associations must send a final season invoice to schools within one week of the completion of the season. Schools are discouraged from paying officials at the game site.
(f) Officials may register with only one (1) local association per sport during a school year, and officials are not allowed to officiate GHSA events until the registration process has been completed with the GHSA office.
(g) In the event that a local association does not have a sufficient number of eligible officials to work on a specific day/night, officials may be requested from other GHSA-chartered associations. It is the responsibility of the local association assignor in need of additional officials to make the initial contact with the assignor of another association to work out details of the request.
(h) All GHSA chartered associations and registered contest officials shall comply with the policies and standards referenced in the GHSA Contest Officials Handbook and Accountability Manual.
4.53 Contest officials and officials’ associations are independent contractors and not employees of the GHSA or its member schools.
4.54 In the event that officials do not show for a scheduled event without notification or emergency situation, a fine shall be assessed to the officials association for twice the amount of the game fees and that amount be divided between the competing schools.
4.55 All decisions of the GHSA Executive Director in regards to officials shall be subject to the appellate procedures as set forth in the GHSA Constitution.
4.56 Universal contest fees shall be charged for all scheduled, regular-season interscholastic contests (including scrimmages). The universal fee schedule shall be as shown in the chart in Appendix F. Schools and officiating associations may not reduce or increase game fees from those listed in this section. Penalties may be imposed for those violating this rule.
4.60 - SPECIAL GHSA POLICIES
4.61 Gender Equity: The Georgia High School Association shall comply with the requirements of subsections(a) through (f) of Code Section 20-2-314, as those requirements relate to the association's functions of organizing, sanctioning, scheduling, or rule making for events in which public high schools participate. The Georgia High School Association shall, no later than October 1, 2003, and every year thereafter, submit a report to the General Assembly regarding its compliance with paragraph (1) of this subsection. Such report shall address the number, type, and disposition of written requests for the association to organize and administer regional or state events for additional or different sports; written requests for information regarding the types of athletic events for public high school students that the association organizes and administers; and written inquiries and complaints received by the association with respect to gender discrimination in connection with public high school events. The report shall address all such written requests, inquiries, and complaints, regardless of whether such request, inquiry, or complaint is made by letter, e-mail, memorandum, or any other form of written communication. Each report shall cover the time period beginning on July 1 of the previous year and ending on June 30 of the year in which the report is due. In addition, the association shall have in effect a policy requiring notification to persons who make such requests, inquiries, or complaints verbally that such request, inquiry, or complaint will not be included in the association's reporting to the General Assembly regarding compliance with this Code section unless such request, inquiry, or complaint is made in writing.
4.62 Open Meeting/Open Records: The Georgia High School Association shall comply with the requirements of Article 4 of Chapter 18 of Title 50, relating to the inspection of public records, and Chapter 14 of Title 50, relating to open and public meetings, to the extent that such records and meetings relate to the association's activities with respect to public high schools; provided, however, that such association shall not be required to comply with such statutes or to conduct open and public meetings or provide inspection of records where the sole subject of such meeting or record pertains to the academic records or performance of an individual student or the eligibility of an individual student to participate or to continue to participate in sponsored events or contests based on academics; provided. However, where a meeting or record of such association is devoted in part to matters excepted in the preceding proviso, any portion of the meeting or record not subject to such exception shall be open to the public.
4.63 Steroids/Performance Enhancing Drugs: The Georgia High School Association strongly opposes the abuse of anabolic steroids and other performance enhancing substances by high school student-athletes. The GHSA believes that such usage violates legal, ethical and competitive-equity standards and imposes unreasonable long-term health risks on the user. The GHSA encourages member schools to educate students and coaches about the perils of steroid usage, and the GHSA will distribute educational materials about this issue to member schools.
4.64 Penalties for Violations: In accordance with the GHSA Constitution, the Executive Director is empowered to make a determination as to whether a violation of GHSA rules has occurred, and to assess the appropriate penalty which may include a fine and/or probation. A non-exhaustive list of violations and fines is published in Appendix P of the Constitution & By-Laws.
SITUATION: A school that is hosting a GHSA playoff event wants free admission for all people who normally are given free admission at regular season events. Is this permissible?
RULING: No. At GHSA playoff events only those people holding GHSA passes, GAOA membership cards or valid media passes are allowed free admission.
 
(NOTE: State Playoff Brackets for ALL sports can be found in Appendix B at the end of this publication)
 
 
 
 
SECTION 1
BASEBALL

(2014-15)

 
GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. Baseball is a state championship event in each classification, and schools are aligned on a regional basis. In Class A, there will be separate championships for public and private schools.
 
B. All baseball games will be played by the baseball rules as published by the National Federation of State High School Associations.
 
C. The maximum number of baseball games allowed (not including state playoffs) is twenty-six (26). Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
 
D. A school shall not allow its baseball team to engage in an interscholastic practice and/or scrimmage game, except for one (1) interscholastic scrimmage consisting of a 7-inning game using a “free substitution” format and umpires registered with the GHSA.
 
E. All varsity baseball games shall be played with officially-dressed officials who are registered under the GHSA plan for the registration of officials.
1. The assignment of officials for regular-season games, invitational tournaments, and any sub-region or region playoffs allowed in the 26-game limit will be made by the GHSA office.
 (a) The GHSA will assign one or more associations to each school for their games.
 (b) The school and the local association(s) will sign a contract for the games that are assigned.
2. In accordance with By-Law 2.71-c, the host school has the responsibility of providing security escorts for umpires at all regular-season and post-season games.
 
F. The following items allowed in the National Federation rule book as “State Adoptions” have been adopted by the GHSA:
1. A game will end anytime that a team is 10 or more runs behind and has completed five or more turns at bat.  A game will end anytime that a team is 15 or more runs behind and has completed three or more turns at bat.
2. The suspended game rule will be used:
 (a) When a game is stopped before it becomes a legal game (4.5 or 5 innings), it is considered “no contest” and any replay will begin from the first inning.
 (b) When a game is stopped after it becomes a legal game and a winner can be determined, it is a completed game.
 (c) When a game is stopped after it becomes a legal game and a winner can not be determined, any replay will begin from the point of interruption.
 (d) In any terminated game, pitching innings will count.
3. The use of the “courtesy runner” is the only “speed-up rule” that has been adopted.  Being a courtesy runner does not count as a game played.
 
G. The following interpretations have been approved by the GHSA.
1. Termination of the game due to weather, unplayable conditions, or mechanical malfunctions:
 (a) The umpires may halt play for up to two hours when conditions do not allow play to continue.
  (1) The two-hour interruption(s) is cumulative
  (2) The game must be terminated when the two-hour  time has elapsed. If the first game of a doubleheader is terminated, the second game will be postponed.
  (3) The two-hour period does not include time needed to prepare the field for the resumption of play.
 (b) Umpires must wait for at least thirty (30) minutes before terminating a game for unplayable field conditions.
2. Pitching restrictions:
 (a) Pitchers are limited to a maximum of ten (10) innings in a calendar day.
 (b) Pitchers are limited to a maximum of fourteen (14) innings in four (4) consecutive calendar days.
 (c) Entry into the ballgame as a pitcher constitutes an inning pitched. After the initial inning pitched by that individual, one pitch constitutes an inning pitched.
 (d) innings count when pitched in a terminated game that is a no-contest.
 (e) When a pitcher exceeds the pitching limits, he becomes an ineligible player.
 
STATE PLAYOFFS:
 
A. Four teams from each region will advance to the state playoffs.  Regions must determine their four winners within the 26-game playing limit.  Class A teams will qualify for the playoffs through a power rating system.
 
B. When a region does not have a tie breaker method in place, the following procedure will be used for seeding purposes:
1. Percentage of head-to-head wins against tied teams
2. Least number of runs allowed between tied teams
3. Least number of runs allowed in overall region play
4. Mini-game of five (5) innings
5. In any step of the tie-breaking process if a tie involving more than two teams is broken so that all ties are broken, that step determines the placements. If two teams remain tied after a step is completed, revert back to head-to-head record to break the tie. If the tie cannot be broken, move to the next step.
 
C. All rounds of the state playoff involve a best two-of-three series.
1. The higher seeded team, or the team designated as the host team on the predetermined brackets (if the teams are equal seeds), will host all three games.
2. A doubleheader is required on the first day of each round of the playoff series.
3. At the championship round, the Executive Director may grant a format exception if the two teams are from the same vicinity and travel is not a factor.
4. The host team will be the home team in the first game, and the visiting team will be the home team in the second game.  There will be a coin flip to determine the home team if the series goes to a third game.
5. At the end of each day's competition, the host school will report the results to the GHSA office, or a designated location.
6. The responsibilities of the host team are to:
 (a) furnish game balls beyond those furnished by the GHSA
 (b) notify the GHSA office as to the arrangements for the series
7. In the event that two schools involved can not agree on the arrangements for the series (dates, times, etc.), the GHSA Executive Director will make a ruling to cover the situation.
 
D. The time-frame for the 2015 state playoff is as follows:
1. Round 1 (All Classes):  DH on May 1, If game on May 2, rain day on May 4
2. Round 2 (All Classes):  DH on May 6, If game on May 7, rain day on May 8
3. Semifinals (Class A):  DH on May 11, If game on May 12, rain day on May 13
4. Round 3 (Classes 2A-6A):  DH on May 12, If game on May 13, rain day on May 14
5. Finals (Class A):  DH on May 16, If game on May 18, rain day on May 19
6. Finals (Classes 2A-6A):  DH on May 23, If game on May 25, rain day on May 26
 
E. The finances for the state playoffs are as follows:
1. Admission fee must be charged for all post-season games, and the cost is $7 per day.
2. Total gate receipts include all ticket sales and radio/television payments (see fee schedule in Broadcast section 2.80).
 (a) The fee for a radio broadcast is paid to the host school prior to the game and is added into the gate receipts.
 (b) Television contracts are negotiated by the GHSA Executive Director.
 (c) Money from concessions and program sales are not part of the gate receipts.
3. The process of dealing with finances is handled as follows:
 (a) Admission must be charged for all Playoff games.
 (b) Twelve percent (12%) of the gross receipts will be paid to the GHSA.
 (c) The umpires will be paid out of gross receipts.  
  NOTE:  If the gross receipts are not sufficient to pay the umpires, the host school will pay that cost.
 (d) The remaining balance is to be divided with 60% of the proceeds going to the visiting team and 40% to the host team.
  (1) Mileage to the visiting team is covered in their 60% share of receipts.  No extra mileage is paid.
  (2) The host team is responsible for paying local service charges, stadium charges, operating expenses, personnel costs, etc., out of their 40% share.
 
 
SECTION 2
BASKETBALL

(2014-15)

 
GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. Basketball is a state championship event in each classification for boys and girls, and schools are aligned on a regional basis. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
 
B. All basketball games will be played by the basketball rules as published by the National Federation of State High School Associations.
 
C. The number of basketball games allowed (not including regional, sectional and state tournaments) is twenty-five (25) regular season games either in head-to-head competition or in invitational tournaments that have been approved by the GHSA.
 
D. The following limitations exist for basketball games played on a day and/or night before a school day:
1. Only one (1) day and/or night preceding a school day per week may be used for playing basketball.  
 EXCEPTION:  region, sectional and state tournaments
2. A student may play on only one day and/or night preceding a school day per week.
3. For doubleheaders on nights before a school day (JV-Varsity or Girl-Boy Varsity), the first game must begin no later than 6:00 p.m.
4. Warm-up time between the girls and boys games is set at fifteen (15) minutes. The host school will start the clock between games when the last players from the first game have left the floor.
5. Invitational tournaments with games on a day and/or night preceding a school day must begin the next-to-last game no later than 6:00 p.m.
6. Sub-varsity games shall be played using seven (7) minute quarters. Note: Playing time may be reduced to comply with school day starting time restrictions.
 
E. MERCY RULE: In accordance with National Federation rule options, the second half of a game may be reduced to six (6) minute quarters, while using normal timing/scoring rules when:
 (a)  The point differential at halftime is forty (40) points or greater, and the coach of the trailing team wishes to have the “Mercy Rule” imposed.
 (b) The point differential at the beginning of the fourth (4th) quarter is thirty (30) points or greater, the “Mercy Rule” will be invoked automatically.
 
F. All varsity basketball games shall be played with officially-dressed basketball officials who are registered under the GHSA plan for the registration of officials.
1. The assignment of officials associations for regular-season games, invitational tournaments, and sub-region and region tournaments will be made by the GHSA office.
 (a) The GHSA will assign one or more associations to each school for their games.
 (b) The school and the local association(s) will sign a contract for the games that are assigned.
2. The host school must provide a safe and secure changing area near the playing court for contest officials, free from traffic by school staff, students and spectators one hour prior to game time, during the duration of the contest(s) and until the contest officials depart the facility.
3. In accordance with By-Law 2.71-c, the host school has the responsibility for providing security escorts for officials at all regular season games and tournaments.
 
G. MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION:
1. Cheerleaders at basketball games shall be restricted from the area at the end of the court during the time a game is in progress unless they are more than eight (8) feet from the boundary line of the court.
 (a) This includes when cheerleaders are in an “L” shape with part of them on the sideline and part on the endline.
 (b) The host school or tournament director is responsible for enforcing this rule.
2. The throwing of souvenirs (such as small basketballs, t-shirts, etc.) into the stands is prohibited until after the final basketball game of the day.
3. No artificial noisemakers (including megaphones) shall be allowed in the gym during basketball games.
4. Bands shall not play while the game is in progress; the home school is responsible for enforcing this rule.
5. The practice of cutting or removing nets, or hanging on the rim or backboard is prohibited at all GHSA games.
6. For the pregame and second half warmup period and during the time of team introductions, teams can not run around or through the opposing team’s half of the court and the midcourt circle area is off limits to both teams.  The penalty for violation of this rule will be a technical foul if the officials have taken jurisdiction of the game.
7. All spectators must wear shirts during the games.
8. The host school should provide dressing areas for visiting teams in close proximity to the playing floor. Game managers, in conjunction with game officials, may extend halftime intermission to 15 minutes if the dressing area is not in close proximity to the playing floor.
9. Coaching boxes must be marked on the floor in both bench areas with one line that is 14 feet from the end line of the court and a second line that is 28 feet from that location.
10. An “X” must be marked on the floor in front of the spot where the scorekeeper sits in order to facilitate the substitution process.
11. Players are prohibited from warming up on the court at halftime intermission of the preceding game.
12. In accordance with NFHS rules, the official scorer is required to wear a black-and-white, vertically-striped shirt.
13. There shall be a minimum warm-up time of 12 minutes between multiple games.
 
REGION TOURNAMENTS:
 
A. Each region will decide its method for determining the teams that will advance to the State Tournament.
1. Four teams from each region will advance to the First Round of the State Tournament in all classifications (boys and girls), even when the region is sub-divided.  
2. No region may use a double elimination tournament.
3. The tournament committee or tournament director shall secure the services of competent scorekeeper(s) and clock operator(s).  NOTE: No team shall have the privilege of placing its scorekeeper and/or timekeeper at or near the position of the official scorekeeper and clock operator.
 
B. Officials associations for all sub-region and region tournaments will be assigned by the GHSA Office.
1. It is recommended that the same number of officials be used in sub-region/region tournaments as used in the State Tournament.
2. Issues for covering the tournament will be handled by the tournament director and the assigning officer of the selected officials association.
3. Officials may not work back-to-back games in the post-season except in emergency situations.
 
C. Subregion and/or region tournament dates and game times must be submitted to the GHSA office no later than January 15th of that season.  If the sites are to be determined by region standings, that information shall be submitted to the GHSA office within 24 hours of the site determination.
 
D. Region post-season games (play-in games, sub-region games and full region games) must have a minimum of two games at each site.
 
STATE TOURNAMENT
 
A. In the First Round through the Quarterfinal Round the higher-seeded teams will host (if equal seeds meet, a coin flip will determine the host school).
1. In the First Round through the Quarterfinal Round, the girls teams will play on the first night of the designated play period, while the boys teams will play on the second night. If the same school hosts both boys and girls games, the host school may petition to schedule a doubleheader with the following stipulations:
 (a) If the day of the game is changed, all participating schools must agree to play the doubleheader.
 (b) If a doubleheader is scheduled, it must be played on the second playing date for that round.
 (c) a revised financial arrangement will be in effect.
2. Officials will be assigned by the GHSA office. Officials may not work back-to-back games in the post-season except in emergency situations.
3. The host team will provide the timer and scorer.
4. All other GHSA by-laws pertaining to the State Tournament apply to First Round through Quarterfinal Round games except where specified.
5. FINANCES:
 (a)  All seats are general admission, and tickets will be full-price for each day of the tournament.
 
B. Until eliminated from the tournament of its respective classification, each team will be entitled to free admission at their site on the date of their game only:
1. A maximum of twenty (20) players, managers, and other bench personnel.
2. A maximum of sixteen (16) cheerleaders in uniform.
3. Coaches will be admitted with a GHSA coaching pass.
4. The school will be charged by the GHSA office for additional personnel entering at the team gate.
5. Floor passes will be given to the basketball coaches listed on the official roster and a maximum of six auxiliary personnel (managers, statisticians, and trainers).
6. Team Instructions for State Tournament games will be available on the GHSA web site.
 
C. In the First Round through the Quarterfinal Round, the host team is designated as the home team and will wear white jerseys.  In the Semifinal and Final Rounds, the team listed at the bottom of the bracket is designated as the home team, and will wear white jerseys, regardless of the seeding in prior rounds.
 
D. Upon arriving at the tournament site, the head coach or a designee shall:
1. submit a complete lineup to the official scorer.
2. verify with the opposing coach the color of jerseys being worn.
 
E. Tournament sites will not be available to participating teams prior to the tournament.  EXCEPTION:  When the team of the host school is in the tournament.
1. Teams playing in the first game of the day shall have access to the court no earlier than thirty (30) minutes before game time.
2. There will be fifteen (15) minutes between tournament games.
 
F. Each team is responsible for providing its own basketballs for warm-ups, towels, training supplies, and half-time refreshments, unless notified differently by the GHSA office. The GHSA will provide game balls at the Semifinal and Final Rounds.
 
G. Each school is responsible for the behavior of its coaches, players, and spectators at tournament games. Therefore, the behavior of these groups must be monitored by school administrators, especially (but not exclusively) in the following areas:
1. No bands, artificial noise makers, banners or signs, radios or other music-producing devices are allowed.
2. Throwing objects on the floor will not be tolerated.
3. Cutting nets, hanging on rims, climbing on backboards is prohibited.
4. Security personnel may ask that spectators refrain from standing the entire game if it blocks the view of other spectators who choose not to stand.
5. Displays of unsportsmanlike conduct directed toward the opposing team or the officials will not be tolerated.
 
H. Each school in the tournament is allowed to have one video camera filming only its games under the following conditions:
1. The video personnel of the school must film from an area designated by the Tournament Director.
2. The video of the tournament game(s) may not be shown at the school or in the community for admission, nor on cable television (see regulations in Broadcast section 2.80) without authorization from the GHSA.
 
I. Tournament Officials
1. Officials for State Tournament play will be selected using the following criteria:
 a. District partnership rankings.
 b. Evaluation reports from regular season games.
 c. Nominations from members of the Evaluation Committee.
 d. Evaluations from previous State Tournament games.
2. There will be three (3) officials on the court in all State Tournament games.
3. Official scorekeepers for the State Tournament will be selected by the GHSA office from a list compiled from recommendations by Region Secretaries.
 
SECTION 3
CHEERLEADING

(2014-15)

 
GENERAL INFORMATION - SUPPORT/SPIRIT AND COMPETITIVE:
 
A. The State Cheerleading Coordinator is Pam Carter, e-mail: PCarterS@aol.com
 
B. Schools may have only one (1) varsity competitive team. Schools may choose to have any number of support/spirit squad(s) that do(es) not compete.
 
C. All cheerleaders (competitive and non-competitive) must be eligible according to academic standards and the transfer rule and must be declared eligible by the GHSA office on the proper eligibility forms. Non-students are not allowed to be part of a sideline cheerleading group either as mascot or “junior cheerleader.”
 
D. All cheerleaders (competitive and non-competitive) must have a physical examination on file in the school office before they may try out, practice, or perform.
 
E. All cheerleading coaches (support/spirit and competitive) must complete a GHSA Rules Clinic or the school will be fined.
 
F. At basketball games, support/spirit squads may perform stunts and/or tumbling that are allowed by NFHS Spirit rules without mats.  NOTE:  National Federation rules dealing with safety are to be followed in any cheerleading practice or performance.
 
G. MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION:
1. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
2. Cheerleading teams are allowed to attend camps after the last day of school until August 1st.
3. Spirit Cheerleading season ends after the last day of school.
4. Out-of-season practices may be held in preparation for tryouts only.  Once tryouts are complete, no practices may be held until school is out.  Practices for tryouts are limited to a maximum of ten (10) consecutive school days per school between February 1 and the last day students are in school.
5. Eligibility for try-outs:
 (a) Students must be enrolled at a school in order to try out for that school's cheerleading team.  A student may be enrolled in only one school at a time.
  EXCEPTION:  See By-Law #1.45 (g)
 (b) Enrolled migrant students may try out for a cheerleading team, but may not represent the school at the varsity level during the school year until the migratory sit-out period has ended.
 (c) An academically ineligible student may try out if passing ALL courses at the time of the tryout.
 
COMPETITION RULES:
 
A. Cheerleading is a state championship sport in each classification for non coed teams and schools are aligned on a regional basis for 2-A through 6A. Class A will have public/private Sectional competitions. There is also an open division (all classifications together) for coed competition, but schools are allowed only one varsity competitive team.  NOTE:  The term “non coed” refers to all-female teams throughout this section.
 
B. All cheerleading competitions must be conducted according to the rules of the “National Federation Spirit Rules Book” and the “GHSA Competitive Cheerleading Manual.” The GHSA cheerleading manuals are posted on the GHSA web site.
 
C. The maximum number of competitions for varsity cheerleading is six (6), plus region and state competitions.
1. All competitions must be sanctioned by the GHSA by May 5.
2. GHSA sanctioned Cheerleading competitions may include member schools only or schools from other states  who are members of their state association.  This excludes non-member high schools and all middle schools.
3. Cheerleading exhibitions are not allowed at any GHSA sanctioned invitational tournament.
4. No competition may lead to a national championship.
5. Cheerleading coaches, certified teachers and Community Coaches may not be involved in any way during the school year with a competition not sanctioned by GHSA that involves cheerleaders on their school's team.
6. Only coaches who meet the criteria of By-Law 2.50 are eligible to assist teams in the competitive setting. Any others assisting a team in any manner at a GHSA competition will be guilty of illegal coaching.
7. Groups that are not members of the GHSA may NOT perform at any time before, during, or after the competition without approval from the GHSA office.
 
D. Deadlines for the competitive season are as follows:
1. Request Sanction of Regular Season Invitational Tournament    -  May 5
2. Register to enter Regular Season Invitational Tournaments    -  August 5
3. Submit “Notification of Entry” and rosters to Region Secretary electronically -  October 1
 
E. A competitive cheerleading team is comprised of a maximum of sixteen performers.
1. A team mascot (if used) is included as one of the sixteen performers.
2. A school may have a roster greater than sixteen performers, and may use any combination of eligible cheerleaders in any competition in each specific division.
3. All team members must be dressed in the appropriate adopted school uniform that displays the school identification (i.e., letter, monogram, mascot symbol, etc.)  NOTE: The mascot is exempt from the uniform rule.
 
F. The competitive area is a 42’x42’ blue cheerleading mat, and the routine must be performed within the boundaries of the competitive area. Mats must have a minimum thickness of 1 3/8 inches.
1. A full set of cheerleading mats (42’x42’) must be used in all competitions including invitationals, regional, and state competitions.
2. Only coaches, competitors, and officials are allowed in the competitive area.
3. Only team members may act as spotters.
4. Non-competitors may not assist during the routine.
5. All mats should be placed on the floor horizontally facing the judges.  Center of the mat should be marked with tape. The floor will be considered out-of-bounds.
6. It is recommended, but not mandatory, that cheerleaders practice stunting on one or more 6'x42' cheerleading mats prior to performing stunts in a team routine.
 
G. The competitive routine must include both cheer and dance.
1. Tumbling skills are permitted only within the body of the routine.
2. Tumbling skills may not be performed as a part of the entrance to or exit from the competitive area.
3. Pom-poms are the only props allowed in a competitive routine.
 
H. The length of the routine shall be a maximum of two minutes and thirty seconds (2:30), timed by an official timer.
1. The routine must begin within thirty (30) seconds of the head judge's signal.  Failure to do so shall result in a five-point deduction for delay of the meet.
2. Teams may begin from any position inbounds, and the time of the routine will begin with the first word, musical sound, or movement of any team member.
3. The routine ends on the last word, musical sound, or movement of any team member.
4. If the routine ends with a pyramid, the final dismount is not timed.
5. There is no minimum/maximum time limit for music in the routine.
6. If the routine is longer than the allotted time, a deduction of five (5) points for every fifteen (15) second period or portion thereof will be assessed.
 
I. Each school is responsible for the preparation and presentation of the music in its routine.
1. The principal must review the music to be used in the school's routine, and must stipulate that the music is in good taste for high school students and acceptable for the morals of their community.
2. Each school must furnish a high-quality CD of their music.
 NOTE:  It is recommended that each school bring an identical back-up CD.
3. The coach or team representative is responsible for starting and stopping the music during the competition.
4. Schools are responsible for furnishing their own equipment and music for use in the practice/warm-up area.
 
J. Competitive routines shall be judged according to the following criteria:
1. Judging Categories
 (a) Jumps
   Degree of Difficulty -   6 points
   Execution -   8 points
 (b) Standing Tumbling
   Degree of Difficulty -   6 points
   Execution -   8 points
 (c) Running Tumbling
   Degree of Difficulty -   6 points
   Execution -   8 points
 (d) Partner Stunts/Tosses
   Degree of Difficulty -   8 points
   Execution - 10 points
 (e) Pyramids
   Degree of Difficulty -   8 points
   Execution - 10 points
 (f) Dance -   8 points
 (g) Cheer/Chant -   5 points
 (h) Creativity -   3 points
 (i) Formations/Transitions -   3 points
 (j) Showmanship -   3 points
2. Deductions will be made for the following:
 (a) NFHS Rules Violations (minor) -   -2 points
 (b) NFHS Rules Violations (major) -   -5 points
 (c) Sportsmanship - -10 points
 (d) Improper uniforms -   -5 points
 (e) Falls -   -5 points
 (f) Tumbling outside of the Routine -   -5 points
 (g) Boundary violations -   -5 points
 (h) Delay of meet -   -5 points
 (i) Time infractions (overtime) -   -5 points for each 15 seconds or portion thereof
3. Disqualifications will be made for the following:
 (a) Illegal substitution (ineligible member or non-team member)
 (c) Too many members on a competitive squad
 (d) Unauthorized props
 
K. Winners in the competitions will be determined by the highest point total from the judges after the highest score and the lowest score have been dropped.
1. In case of a tie, all judges’ scores will be totaled.
2. If a tie still remains after all scores have been totaled, all judges will determine the ranking of the tied teams to break the tie.
 
L. Prior to any disqualification for a rules violation, the Head Judge must call a conference at the conclusion of competition, and the majority of the judges must agree the violation occurred.
 
M. Judges' decisions are final.
 
N. In all competitions, all judges must be registered with the GHSA and must have completed the GHSA training program.
1. A minimum of five judges and two safety judges will be used at all competitions, plus scorers and timer.
2. Judges must be secured by certified school personnel by contacting the assigning officer of a local judges' association.
 
O. Five percent (5%) of the gross receipts from all invitational competitions shall be paid to the GHSA office.
 
 
REGION COMPETITION:
 
A. Each school is allowed to enter one team in the region competition for the non coed division.  There are no region competitions in Class A nor in the coed division.
1. Entry notification and roster must be sent to the Region Secretary (or GHSA Office for Class A and Coed) according to deadline dates. All rosters must be submitted to the GHSA office electronically.
 NOTE:  Substitutions may be made at any time after the roster has been submitted.
2. The principal must approve the music being used.
 
B. Teams from each region competition will advance to the state competition as follows:
1. First place team from each Region in classes 2A through 6A will advance directly to the State competition.
2. The second, third, and fourth place teams from each Region in 2A through 6A will compete in a Sectional Tournament with eight (8) teams from each classification advancing to State competition.
3. All Class A Public schools and Class A Private schools will compete in separate Sectional tournaments with eight (8) teams in each advancing to the State competition.
 
C. A panel of judges to be used at invitationals, region, sectional, and state competitions will consist of five judges and two safety judges.  More than one panel of judges may be used if necessary.
 
D. Five percent (5%) of the gross receipts from the region competition must be paid to the GHSA office.
 
E. Region/Sectional competitions will be held on Saturday, November 8, 2014. The region secretaries involved with each region shall determine the procedures for finances, awards, number of judges, etc.
GHSA has determined the sites as follows:
 
Southwest Georgia (at Columbus State) Central Georgia (at Mercer University)
 Host: Northside-Columbus HS  Host: Putnam County HS
 1-AAAAA  1-AAAAAA
 4-AAAAA  2-AAAAA
 4-AAAA  1-AAAA
 2-AAA  4-AA
 1-AA  8-AA
 COED Sectionals  All Class A Teams -Sectionals   
 
Southeast Georgia (at West Laurens HS) Northeast Georgia (at Dawson County HS)
 3-AAAAA  6-AAAAAA
 2-AAAA  7-AAAAAA
 3-AAAA  8-AAAAA
 1-AAA  7-AAAA
 3-AAA  8-AAAA
 2-AA  7-AAA
 3-AA  8-AAA
 
North Central Georgia (at Kennesaw Mtn. HS) Northwest Georgia (at West Georgia University)
 2-AAAAAA  Host: Carrollton HS
 4-AAAAAA  3-AAAAAA
 8-AAAAAA  5-AAAAAA
 6-AAAAA  5-AAAAA
 7-AAAAA  5-AAAA
 6-AAAA  5-AAA
 4-AAA  5-AA
 6-AAA  7-AA
 6-AA  
 
COED COMPETITION:
 
A. There will be a separate Open Meet competition (all classifications) for coed teams.  
1. Schools must declare entry into the Coed Open Meet Division prior to June 1 each year.
2. Having one or more males constitutes a coed team.
3. Once a team has declared their division of competition, they will not be able to switch to the other.  NOTE:  When a coed team consists of only one male, and loses that one male, the team will still be required to compete in the coed division, unless a waiver is granted by the GHSA for a hardship reason.  The deadline to petition the GHSA office to switch from Coed to an all-female team is the second Wednesday in September.
4. Coed teams and non coed teams may not compete against one another in the regular season.
5. The Coed Sectionals will be held on Saturday, November 8, 2014, at Columbus State University.  The top sixteen (16) teams will advance to the State Championship.
6. The Coed State Championship will be held on Friday, November 14, 2014, at the Columbus Civic Center. NOTE:  The GHSA office has the authority to make adjustments in the Coed format depending on the number of teams declared Coed.
 
 
STATE COMPETITION:
 
A. Friday, November 14, 2014, Columbus Civic Center
1. First Session:  Classes 2A, 3A and 4A will begin at 9:00 a.m.
2. Second Session:  Classes 5A, 6A and Class A State Championships will begin at 3:00 p.m.
In each competitive session, the routines will alternate classifications. The top eight (8) teams from each Class advance to the State Finals.
 
All Sectionals (2A through 6A) - Order of Performance
ORDER REGION TEAM  ORDER  REGION   TEAM
 1 Region 6 Team 4   13 Region 2 Team 2
 2 Region 7 Team 4   14 Region 3 Team 2
 3 Region 8 Team 4   15 Region 4 Team 2
 4 Region 1 Team 4   16 Region 5 Team 2
 5 Region 6 Team 3   17 Region 2 Team 3
 6 Region 7 Team 3   18 Region 3 Team 3
 7 Region 8 Team 3   19 Region 4 Team 3
 8 Region 1 Team 3   20 Region 5 Team 3
 9 Region 6 Team 2   21 Region 2 Team 4
 10 Region 7 Team 2   22 Region 3 Team 4
 11 Region 8 Team 2   23 Region 4 Team 4
 12 Region 1 Team 2   24 Region 5 Team 4
        (15-minute intermission after No. 12)
 
Order for Class A State Championships (public and private)
ORDER TEAM   ORDER TEAM
1 Sectional - Team 7 (Private)    9 Sectional - Team 2 (Private)
2 Sectional - Team 7 (Public)   10 Sectional - Team 2 (Public)
3 Sectional - Team 5 (Private)  11 Sectional - Team 4 (Private)
4 Sectional - Team 5 (Public)   12 Sectional - Team 4 (Public)
5 Sectional - Team 3 (Private)  13 Sectional - Team 6 (Private)
6 Sectional - Team 3 (Public)   14 Sectional - Team 6 (Public)
7 Sectional - Team 1 (Private)  15 Sectional - Team 8 (Private)
8 Sectional - Team 1 (Public)   16 Sectional - Team 8 (Public)
        (15-minute intermission after No. 8)
 
C. Saturday, November 15, 2014, Columbus Civic Center
1. First Session:  Classes 2A, 3A and 4A FINALS will begin at 9:00 a.m.
2. Second Session:  Classes 5A, 6A and COED FINALS will begin at 2:00 p.m.
3. In each competitive session, the routines will alternate classifications.  
 
ORDER 2A through 6A FINALS COED FINALS
   1 Sectional - Team 7 Sectional - Team 15
   2 Sectional - Team 5 Sectional - Team 13
   3 Sectional - Team 3 Sectional - Team 11
   4 Sectional - Team 1 Sectional - Team 9
   5 Region 5 - Team 1 Sectional - Team 7
   6 Region 6 - Team 1 Sectional - Team 5
   7 Region 7 - Team 1 Sectional - Team 3
   8 Region 8 - Team 1 Sectional - Team 1
        (15-minute intermission after No. 8)
   9 Region 1 - Team 1 Sectional - Team 2
 10 Region 2 - Team 1 Sectional - Team 4
 11 Region 3 - Team 1 Sectional - Team 6
 12 Region 4 - Team 1 Sectional - Team 8
 13 Sectional - Team 2 Sectional - Team 10
 14 Sectional - Team 4 Sectional - Team 12
 15 Sectional - Team 6 Sectional - Team 14
 16 Sectional - Team 8 Sectional - Team 16
 
D. Flash cameras will not be allowed during the competition.
 
E. A panel consisting of five judges and two safety judges each (selected by the GHSA) per classification, shall judge the state competition.
 
F. Finances:
1. Admission cost will be $12.00 per session.
2. Net receipts (after expenses have been paid) will be divided with the GHSA receiving 40% and 60% divided among the participating schools.
 
SECTION 4
CROSS COUNTRY

(2014-15)

GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. Cross Country is a team championship sport for boys and girls that is held on region basis for classes 2A through 6A. Class A will be organized into two (2) divisions; one for public schools and one for private schools. Class A schools, public and private, will be assigned to four (4) Areas, a list of which may be found on the GHSA web site.
 
B. The distance for both boys and girls Cross Country will be approximately three (3) miles or five (5) kilometers.
 
C. All GHSA Cross Country meets will be run in accordance with the rules as published in the National Federation Track and Field and Cross Country Rule Book with any exceptions as may be found in this section.
 
D. The maximum number of competition dates in Cross Country shall be 10, exclusive of region and state competitions.
1. It is permissible for coaches to use “split squads” during the regular season. However, the use of split squads will count as two (2) of that school’s maximum allowed competitions.
2. Any meets involving eight (8) or more schools must be approved by the GHSA Executive Director in accordance with the process found in By-Law 2.64.
3. No individual athlete may compete in more than one (1) race per day.
 
E. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
1. There will be no interscholastic practices in Cross Country.
2. Athletes may run in non-GHSA events as long as they do not represent their school, do not wear the school uniform, and are not coached at the event by their high school coach (“unattached runner”).
3. The following items are not allowed during competition:
  (a) jewelry
  (b) hair beads of any type
  (c) sunglasses
  (d) Electronic devices
 
REGION/AREA COMPETITION:
 
A. Notification of entry in Cross Country must be filed, using the form provided on the GHSA web site, with the Region Secretary no later than September 22, 2014.
 
B. The team roster of twelve (12) participants must be submitted electronically to the GHSA no later than October 21, 2014.
1. Coaches are to list runners in priority order: the top seven (7), then the selected five (5) alternates.
2. Region Secretaries will be able to download their region’s schools’ rosters after this submission.
 
C. 1. Four (4) teams in each region (classes 2A through 6A) and four (4) teams from each Area in Class A public/private will qualify for the State Meet.
 a. All qualifiers must be determined by Saturday, November 1, 2014 (Classes A through 6A).
 b. Area/Region qualifiers must be sent by electronic submission to the GHSA Office within 48 hours of the completion of the Area/Region Meet; but not later than 9:00 a.m., on Monday, November 3, 2014.
2. The first six (6) individual finishers from each region/area will qualify for the State Meet regardless of whether they are a member of a qualifying team.
 
D. Cross Country rosters should list twelve (12) contestants. No replacements may be made in the list submitted to the Region Meet Director. Any seven (7) of the twelve (12) may run in the Region/Area or State.  
 
STATE MEET:
 
A. The State Cross Country Meet for all classifications will be held at Carrollton High School on November 8, 2014.
1. There will be a $5.00 admission fee for all spectators.
2. The Meet Director will be Craig Musselwhite, Carrollton HS.  770-832-2120, ext. 632; Fax:  770-214-2079.
3. The schedule will be as follows:
7:45 am - Boys AAAAA 12:40 pm - Girls AA
8:25 am - Girls AAAAA 1:25 pm - Boys AAAAAA
9:10 am - Boys AAA 2:05 pm - Girls AAAAAA
9:50 am - Girls AAA 2:50 am - Boys A (private)
10:35 am - Boys AAAA  3:30 pm - Girls A (private)
11:15 am - Girls AAAA 4:15 pm - Boys A (public)
12 noon - Boys AA 4:55 pm - Girls A (public)  
4. Awards will be presented at the conclusion of each classification.
 
B. A minimum of five (5) and a maximum of seven (7) entrants are allowed for each team that qualified.
1. The first five (5) finishers for each team will count for the total team score.
2. Each team must begin and end the competition with a minimum of five (5) runners. If, for any reason, a qualifying team does not have five (5) runners, that team will not be allowed to compete in the State Meet.
3. Each member of a qualifying team, as well as individual qualifiers from each region, are considered to be in contention for individual honors.
4. The state cross country course at Carrollton is closed to any individual or team practice until Friday, November 7, 2014 after 3:30 p.m. (the afternoon prior to the state meet).
5. Team Instructions for the State Meet will be available on the GHSA web site.
 
SECTION 5
FOOTBALL

(2014-15)

REGULAR SEASON:
 
A. Football is a state championship sport in each classification, and schools are aligned on a regional basis.  In Class A, there will be separate championships for publc and private schools.
1. In the reclassification year (see Article III of the GHSA Constitution), all regions will meet after reclassification has been finalized by the Executive Committee and after any sub-divisions have been finalized and cross-over games have been arranged.  
 (a) No schedule is valid until the plans of all regions have been approved.
 (b) Plans for determining the ranking and breaking ties of the four region representatives for playoffs must be drawn.
 (c) All contracts should be drawn to coincide with the two-year reclassification period and show the day, date, time, opponent and game site.
2. Each school must file its football schedule with the GHSA Executive Director no later than March 1, each year.
 (a) The schedule must show the day, date, time, opponent, and game site.
 (b) The GHSA Executive Director must be notified concerning any changes made to the schedule after the submission date.
 (c) Any changes made for a region game must be made prior to the date for beginning football practice.
  (1) Any change of opponent after that date will cause the game not to count as a sub-region or region game.
  (2) Limitations regarding schedule changes shall also be construed to prevent a school from canceling a game when such a game could affect the region and/or sub-region standings.
  (3) A change in date or time with the same opponent is not considered a change affecting region or sub-region status.
 (d) Contracts with officials for varsity games must be signed by June 1 each year, and copies of the schedules must be submitted to the proper officials association(s).
 (e) Each school must have a signed contract for its football scrimmage, and a school may be fined for failure to comply with that contract.
 (f) There will be a $250 penalty for schools that change their football schedules after June 1. (NOTE: Appeal procedures are available.)
 
B. All GHSA football games must be played according to the rules as published by the National Federation of State High School Associations, and any other rules found in this section.
 
C. The number of football games allowed (excluding state playoffs) is ten (10).
1. No varsity football game may be played on a night preceding a school day without specific authorization from the GHSA Executive Director.
2. Only one football game may be played per week (the schedule week is a traditional week - Sunday through Saturday) by the same level team (varsity/sub-varsity) except in the case of the GHSA Tie-Breaker Playoff or make-up games due to special circumstances that have been approved by the Executive Director.
3. A single sub-varsity game played on a night before a school day may start no later than 6:30 p.m. The first game of two sub-varsity games played on a night before a school day may start no later than 5:30 p.m.
4. Football players playing on both the varsity and one sub-varsity team are limited to six quarters of competition in any seven (7) day period beginning with the date of the varsity game.  The penalty for violation of this rule will be forfeiture of the game in which the violation occurred and a $1,000.00 fine.
5. The football season ends for a team or individual when that team, having completed its regular-season schedule, is eliminated from playoff competition or wins the State Championship.
6. All JV games will be played with 10-minute quarters. If there is an 8th grade student(s) on the JV team, then 8-minute quarters must be played.
 
D. Football practice may begin five consecutive weekdays prior to August 1st.
1. In the first five days of practice for any student, the practice may not last longer than two (2) hours, and the student may wear no other protective football equipment except helmet and mouthpieces. NOTE:
 (a) The time for a session shall be measured from the time the players report to the practice or workout  area until they leave that area.
 (b) During acclimatization practices, teams may hold a walk-through as long as there is at least a two-hour   break between the two activities.
2. Beginning August 1st, any student may practice in full pads and may practice a maximum of two times in a single calendar day under the following stipulations:
 (a) A student must have participated in five conditioning practices wearing no other protective football equipment except helmet and mouthpieces before being allowed to practice in full pads.
 (b) If two workouts are held in a single calendar day:
  (1) No single session may last longer than three (3) hours.
  (2) The total amount of time in the two practices shall not exceed five (5) hours.
  (3) There must be at least a three-hour time of rest between sessions.
  (4) There may not be consecutive days of two-a-day practice sessions. All double-session days must be followed by a single-session day or a day off.
  (5) A walk-through may not be held on days when two practices are conducted.
 (c) These procedures are derived from recommendations created by the Inter-Association Task Force for Preseason Secondary School Athletics Participants in the paper “Preseason Heat-Acclimatization Guidelines for Secondary School Athletes.”
3. From the end of school in the spring until the first day of preseason practice, players may wear no other protective football equipment except helmets and mouthpieces for all voluntary workouts and passing league games. Institutional heat policies are also in effect for voluntary workouts supervised by school personnel.
4. Team camps that have been approved in writing by the Executive Director may allow participants to wear shoulder pads for blocking drills. Coaches for these players must verify that the participants have had acclimatization practices for five weekdays immediately preceding the camp.
 
E. All varsity football games shall be played with a minimum of five (5) officially-dressed field officials who are registered under the GHSA plan for registering officials. The officiating crew also shall have an electric clock operator whose only duty is to operate the game clock.
1. In all games, the host school must provide some type of dressing facilities for officials at or near the game site that can also be used to hold the pre-game conference.
2. During the regular season, the host school is responsible for providing a crew to work the sideline chains.  These individuals must be responsible adults.
3. In accordance with By-Law 2.71-c, the host school is responsible for providing security escorts for the officials at all regular season and playoff games.
 
F. The following regulations are in place for GHSA football games.
1. All GHSA football games will have a twenty (20) minute halftime unless both school administrators agree in writing by Thursday of game week to shorten the halftime period to fifteen (15) minutes.
2. Artificial noisemakers, except airhorns and whistles, are legal at football games. Illegal noisemakers are to be confiscated when visible and/or used.
3. Bands are not to play during live-ball situations.
 NOTE:  This includes the situation in which there is no timeout and the teams are in a huddle.
 (a) If, during a football game, a team claims interference with communications due to band noise, the Referee shall give a warning to one or both head coaches and the bands must cease playing.
 (b) If there is a second offense by the same school's band, an unsportsmanlike conduct penalty will be imposed against that school's team.
4. During the state playoff series, a crew of six (6) field officials will be used.
5. Fans shall not be allowed to enter the playing field either before the game or at halftime to form a tunnel for players to run through.
6. In the regular season, a school may utilize a visible 25-second clock as long as the time is visible on both ends of the field and the clock is operated by a paid game official.
 
G. Spring Football Practice for each school year may be held on ten (10) school days from February 1 until the end of the school year, spaced over 13 consecutive school days.
1. Schools must choose by February 1 each year as to whether they will have spring football practice.
 (a) If a school conducts spring practice, all preseason practice schedules remain the same.
 (b) If a school chooses not to conduct spring practice, the team will be allowed to hold an additional  (second) scrimmage game or controlled scrimmage against another school in the fall.
 (c) Schools hiring a new coach may appeal to the Executive Director to change an earlier decision.
2. A football coach on the payroll of one school district, but under contract to another school district for the following year, may help with Spring football at the new school, if the arrangement is satisfactory with both systems.
3. Students enrolled in grade 8 in a middle school or junior high school that is a feeder school to the high school may participate in Spring Practice at that high school. These students must be pre-enrolled at that member high school, and once pre-enrolled, the student has established his/her eligibility at that high school.
4. No student (eighth grade or above) may participate in more than ten (10) days of Spring Practice, and may participate for no more than one (1) school.
 
H. In case of a game being terminated in the first half (suspended game), By-Law 2.93-c must be followed.
NOTE:  Football games played between schools from the same classification must be played to completion.  Any interrupted game must be replayed from the point of interruption.  The school that is behind in the score may       
choose not to continue the game.  NOTE:  Teams will not be allowed to play two football games in the same week, except when making up a suspended game with the permission of the Executive Director.
 
I. During warmups before the game and at halftime there shall be a division of the field, and neither team shall enter the other team's portion of the field.  That division shall be as follows:
1. Before the game:  each team shall occupy the space from their own 45-yard line to the endline of their goal line. Neither team shall occupy the area between the 45-yard lines.
 EXCEPTION:  When kicking, each team shall have the area between the opponent's 45-yard line and kicking team's end zone in the side zone area on the same side of the field as their bench.  Kickers shall kick toward their end zone.
2. Re-entering the field before the game and at halftime: each team shall have the portion of the field between their bench and the near edge of each goal post - i.e., field divided lengthwise.
 
J. The GHSA Overtime Procedure will be used whenever two schools from the same classification are tied at the end of regulation play.
1. This procedure involves giving both teams opportunities to score from the 15-yard line until the tie is broken.
2. Schools from differing classifications may use the overtime procedure if agreement is reached and communicated to the Referee before the beginning of the game.
3. Overtime games are exempt from the 11:30 p.m. GHSA curfew.
 
K. MERCY RULE: At the end of the first half of play, if a team is trailing by 30 points or more, the coach of the trailing team may choose to play the second half with a running clock. Quarters will remain at 12 minutes.
1. If the coach does not exercise the option of the running clock, the third quarter will be played with regulation timing.
2. If the point differential reaches, or remains, 30 or more points during the third quarter, the clock will still run according to rule for the remainder of the third quarter, but the fourth quarter will have a running clock mandated.
3. A running clock means the clock will be stopped only:
 (a) after a touchdown and until the ball is kicked off.
 (b) during deliberations for penalty administration.
 (c) during charged timeouts or official’s timeouts
4. A game that is reduced in time by use of a running clock shall constitute a “completed” game to meet other by-law considerations.
 
GHSA OVERTIME PROCEDURE
 
1. There will be a 3-minute intermission between the end of regulation play and the coin toss to start the overtime procedure.
2. The captains will meet for the coin toss, and the winner may choose one of the following:
(a) Be on offense first
(b) Be on defense first
(c) Choose the end of the field on which to play
3. The ball is placed on the 15-yard line and the offense keeps the ball until:
(a) The ball is turned over on downs  (NOTE:  The team on offense can gain a first down.)
(b) The defense gains possession of the ball (ball is dead immediately)
(c) The offense scores a touchdown or field goal
(d) The offense misses a field goal
4. After the first offensive team completes its possession, the opposing team gets its opportunity from the 15-yard line.
5. If the game remains tied after each team has had an offensive possession, there will be a 2-minute intermission and the team that lost the first coin toss has the first option for the second possession.
6. For each additional overtime period (i.e., an offensive possession by each team) the original coin toss options are alternated.
7. Beginning with the third overtime period, a team must attempt a 2-point try after a touchdown.
8. Each team is allowed one timeout per overtime period. No timeouts may be carried over from regulation play.
9. Penalty enforcement is handled the same way in overtime as in regulation play.
 
REGION PROCEDURES:
 
A. To qualify for championship consideration in a region or sub-region, a school must play a minimum number of games with schools in its region as determined by the region and the GHSA Reclassification Committee.
1. In any region or sub-region in which there are six (6) or less schools, if each school plays two (2) games, both games will count as region games. In any other case where two (2) schools have played more than once during the regular season, only the first game scheduled shall count in the region standings.
2. Any school playing a non-region or non sub-region schedule (i.e., not in consideration for a region championship) will not have its games count for or against any opponent.
 
B. The GHSA Executive Director, upon presentation of evidence to show that a school can not secure the required number of games in a region or sub-region, may authorize each school to substitute any number of games in any classification or region to qualify for championship consideration. NOTE: A request for substitution of game(s) must be submitted prior to September 1.
 
C. Four (4) representatives from each region will enter the post-season playoffs.
1. Each region will determine the way to designate the four representatives and their placement in the region (i.e., first place, second place, third place and fourth place).  Class A teams will qualify for the state playoffs through a power rating system.
2. In case there is a tie between two teams and the region does not have a different written tie-breaker plan, the following tie-breaking procedures will be used:
 (a) If the teams played during the regular season, the winner of the game will have the higher placement.
 (b) If the tie remains and both teams have qualified for a playoff spot, the region will determine the placement of the teams that are tied.
 (c) If the tie remains and there is a playoff spot for only one team, the two teams that are tied will meet in a GHSA Tie-Breaker Game.
  (1) The schools shall meet at a site selected by the GHSA Executive Director for a playoff on the Monday night after the end of the regular season.
  (2) The two teams will play a GHSA Tie-breaker Mini-game, and the winning team will have the higher placement.
3. In case there is a tie between three or more teams and there are spots for all the teams in the playoffs, the region shall decide the seeding of the tied teams.
4. In case there is a tie between more than three teams and there are not spots in the playoff for all the teams, the following tie-breaking procedures will be used. NOTE: At any point in this process where a tie can be broken so that only two teams remain tied, consideration of head-to-head competition will be invoked. If the tie is completely broken for all teams involved at any step in the process, the tie-breaker process is completed.
 (a) If the teams that are tied have played during the regular season game and one team has defeated the others, the undefeated team has the highest placement.
 (b) If one team has not beaten all other tied teams, the school with the highest percentage of wins against the tied teams will have the highest placement. If the percentages leave two or more teams still tied, then revert to head-to-head records.
 (c) If the tie remains, the two teams that are tied will meet in a GHSA Tie-breaker Mini-game.
 
D. When a region uses a regular-season playing date for games that determine the seeding of its four playoff teams, all games in the region that night will have officials assigned separately from the regular season assignments. The Region Secretary will work with the GHSA office to coordinate this process.
 
GHSA TIE-BREAKER MINI-GAME PROCEDURE  (NOTE: The option to play a Mini-Game to break a tie is available only to regions that have adopted the GHSA plan for breaking ties without any modifications)
 
1. The schools shall meet at a site selected by the GHSA Executive Director for a playoff on the Monday night after the end of the regular season.
2. The games will consist of two five-minute halves. The play begins for the first half with a free kick, and standard game rules and scoring are used.
3. There will be a two-minute intermission between the halves. Play begins for the second half with a free kick.
4. Each team will be given two (2) timeouts in the first five (5) minutes and one timeout in the second five (5) minutes. Unused timeouts in the first five minutes may be carried over to the second five minutes.
5. If the score is tied at the end of two overtime periods, the teams will go to the GHSA 15-yard overtime procedure.
6. A coin toss will determine the order of play.
 a. When three teams are tied for one open spot, the team winning the toss gets a bye - and then plays the winning team of the first Tie-Breaker game.
    Example:  Team “C” gets a bye
     Team “A” plays Team “B”
     Team “C” plays the winner of game 1
     Winner of game 2 qualifies for the playoffs
 b. When three teams are tied for two open spots, the following format will be used.
    Example: Team “C” get a bye
     Team “A” plays Team “B” and the winner qualifies
     Team “C” plays the loser of game 1 and the winner qualifies
     If Team “C” wins game 2, the regular season winner between Team “C” and
      the winner of game 1 will have the higher placement
 c. When four teams are tied for one open spot, the pairings will be determined by draw and the following format will be used.
    Example: Team “A” plays Team “B” in game 1
     Team “C” plays Team “D” in game 2
     Winner of game 1 plays winner of game 2
     Winner of game 3 qualifies
 d. When four teams are tied for two open spots, the pairings will be determined by draws and the following format will be used.
    Example: Team “A” plays Team “B” in game 1 and the winner qualifies
     Team “C” plays Team “D” in game 2 and the winner qualifies
     The winner of the regular season game between the two winning teams will
     have the higher placement
7. When teams play a mini-game tiebreaker on a Monday, their first round playoff game will be scheduled for the following Saturday unless both schools agree to play on Friday.
 
STATE PLAYOFFS:
 
A. All rounds of games after the end of the regular season are considered part of the state playoff structure.
1. In all rounds but the Finals, the higher seeded team will host.
2. In all rounds except the Finals, game date and time will be set by mutual agreement. If that agreement is not possible, the GHSA Executive Director will finalize the arrangements. If an administrator does not attend the meeting at which the playoff contract is negotiated, the coach shall be authorized by the Principal to negotiate and sign a binding contract.
3. In the Quarterfinal Round, if both teams have the same seeding, a coin toss, which will be conducted via a conference call out of the GHSA office, will determine the host site.
4. For Semifinal Round games:
 (a) The higher seeded team will be the host team. If they do not have a stadium that meets GHSA minimum standards, they may secure a suitable site.
 (b) If both teams have the same seeding, the following procedure will be used:
  (1) If both school/school system sites meet or exceed GHSA standards, a coin toss will determine the host site.
  (2) If only one school/school system site meets or exceeds GHSA standards, that school will host.
  (3) If neither site meets or exceeds GHSA standards, the Executive Director will designate a neutral site.
 (c) The GHSA will provide ticket sellers, pass gate workers and a supervisor at all semifinal games.
5. Playoff ticket prices are as follows (NOTE:  Only babies in arms do not need a ticket.):
 First Round:  $8.00 (All classes)
 Second Round: $10.00 (2A through 6A)
 Quarterfinals:  $12.00 (All classes)
 Semifinals:  $15.00 (All classes)
 Championships: $18.00 for Presale at Schools; $20.00 for Ticketmaster and at Georgia Dome
 
B. All Championship Round games will be played December 12 and 13, in the Georgia Dome.  These games will be known as the “GHSA/Tommy Guillebeau Football Championships.”
1. Only GHSA passes, GAOA membership cards and valid media credentials will be honored for free admission.
2. The expense and revenue shares by classification will be as follows:
 AAAAAA - 19%, AAAAA - 16.5%, AAAA - 16.5%, AAA - 15.5%, AA - 14.5%, A (public & private) - 18%
3. The schedule for the championship games will be three games on Friday and four games on Saturday.
 
C. In order to host a playoff game beyond the third round, a school must meet the following site requirements:
1. Permanent seating requirements:
 (a) One seat equals 24 inches in width. Exception: each theatre style seat (with back and arm rests) will  count as one seat regardless of the width of the seat.
 (b) All seats must be at least 15 feet from playing field.
 (c) Total seating capacity for each class is as follows:
  Class A 2,000 seats
  Class AA 2,500 seats
  Class AAA 3,000 seats
  Class AAAA & AAAAA 4,000 seats
  Class AAAAAA 6,000 seats
 (d) Each principal of a school in the playoffs shall certify that the school stadium meets or does not meet football playoff requirements. If a principal certifies such information falsely, then $2,000.00 of such school's share of the gate receipts of the contest held in the non-complying stadium shall be paid to the opposing team.
 (e) The GHSA will mediate with both teams involved when there are concerns about the safety of a venue in regard to seating limitations.
 (f) For Semifinal games, the host school may use portable seating to bring the stadium seating capacity up to the GHSA minimum as long as (NOTE: Any portable seating brought in for games in earlier rounds must meet these specifications):
  (1) The seating meets the standards of the industry and is installed by professional installers.
  (2) All seats provide clear sight lines to the field of play.
  (3) No costs for the temporary seating are taken out of game receipts.
  (4) Seating requirements for a semifinal game may be waived upon written agreement of the Principals  of the competing schools that the host’s stadium will be adequate and with the approval of the GHSA
   Executive Director.
2. One half of all permanent and temporary seats shall be offered to the visiting team, and it is the responsibility of the home team to regulate the seating so as to guarantee designated seating to the visiting team's supporters.
3. There should be adequate parking space with a recommendation of one (1) space for every four (4) spectators.
4. The stadium shall have adequate working space in the press box as follows (NOTE: the first priority for access to the press box after the clock operator and the PA announcer is the working media):
  Classes A, AA & AAA 30 linear feet
  Class AAAA  40 linear feet
  Classes AAAAA & AAAAAA 50 linear feet
5. Security shall be provided at the site in the ratio of at least one officer per 500 spectators.
6. Facilities for officials to dress, shower, and/or hold meetings shall be made available at the site or nearby.
7. It is mandatory to have emergency medical personnel at the site of all football playoff games.
 
D. Financial Procedures:
1. Total game receipts will include all revenue from ticket sales plus any payments for radio or television broadcasting, and will not include money from the sale of programs and concessions.
2. All band chaperones and other support personnel must have tickets.
3. The division of game receipts will be handled as follows:
 (a) From the gross receipts:
  (1) Twelve percent (12%) will be sent to the GHSA Office along with a financial report. Each Football Financial Report Form shall include the number of spectators admitted with a GHSA pass, along with a copy of the sign-in sheets listing the names and numbers of the passes used.
  (2) The visiting team shall receive reimbursement for travel expenses in the amount of $5.00 per mile (one way) taken from the game receipts and guaranteed by the host school. NOTE: If the game is played at a neutral site, both teams will be reimbursed for mileage.
  (3) The game officials shall be paid.
 (b) After the items in Section “a” above have been paid, the remainder shall be divided equally between the two teams.
 (c) Local service charges, stadium charges, lights, cost of operating personnel, etc., are not to be deducted prior to the division of funds, and are considered a part of the expenses of the host school.
4. Broadcasting procedures are handled as follows:
 (a) The GHSA office will process radio contracts in all rounds of the playoffs. The fee schedule and regulations for radio broadcasts may be found in the Broadcast section 2.80.
 (b) Stations wishing to televise football games must contact the GHSA office for contract terms, fees and conditions.
5. Financial arrangements for the championship games held in the Georgia Dome are designated by the GHSA Executive Committee.
 
E. Game officials will be assigned by the GHSA Office in all playoff rounds.  Officiating crews shall include six (6) field officials, clock operator, and chain crew.
 
SECTION 6
GOLF

(2014-15)

 
GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. Golf is a state championship event for boys and for girls held on a region basis in classes 2A through 6A. Class A schools will compete in Areas and there will be separate championships for public and private schools. In addition to the team competition, there will be an individual competition.
1. Boys Teams:  A team may consist of six (6) players, with the best four (4) scores counting as the team score.
 Girls Teams:  In classes 3A through 6A, a team may consist of four (4) players, with the best three (3) scores counting as the team score. In classes A and 2A, a team may consist of four (4) players, with the best two (2) scores counting as the team score.
2. Players on a girls team will use the tee boxes designated for ladies in regular-season play. Tee boxes used in post-season play will be designated by the director of each Region/Area, Sectional and State tournament to meet course length requirements.
3. If a school does not have a girls team, a girl electing to play on the boys team will be required to play by the rules and procedures for boys.
 
B. All GHSA golf matches shall be conducted in accordance with the “Rules of Golf” as published by the United States Golf Association (USGA). Exceptions specific to all GHSA competitions include:
1. Players may use push/pull carts in regular season and post season matches. Motorized carts or caddies are   not permitted.
2. Range finders and GPS devices will be allowed in match and tournament play with the following stipulations:
 (a) In each grouping (2-4 players), if  any player uses a “range finder” then all players will have access to the distance information.
 (b) Any player using a device who does not share the distance information with other players in his grouping, when asked, will be subject to disqualification for a serious breach of etiquette.
 (c) GPS devices on cell phones or wrist watches are NOT permitted under penalty of disqualification.
 (d) Range finders that calculate slope, wind or other information are NOT permitted under penalty of disqualification.
3. Other electronic devices including, but not limited to, cell phones, cameras, video recorders, etc., may not be used (sending and/or receiving messages or pictures) by players or coaches during competition. EXCEPTION: If a player encounters a dangerous situation (weather, person, animal, medical emergency), he may use a cell phone to call for immediate assistance.
4. If a coach receives information from an “artificial device” (as defined by USGA rules) and passes that   information on to a player during competition, it is grounds for disqualification.
 
C. Notification of entry (“Contestants List”)must be submitted electronically to the GHSA office by April 15, 2015, and the form is found on the GHSA web site. A school may list the allowed number of team members, plus up to four (4) alternates. Lineup changes and/or substitutions may be made at the Region/Area and/or State level using only those players listed on the entry form submitted to the GHSA. (See deadline under State Tournament heading.)
 
D. The number of matches allowed (excluding region, sectional and state tournaments) is twelve (12) playing dates.
NOTE:  A 9-hole match played prior to April 1 will count as 1/2 playing date.
 
E. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
1. There will be no interschool practice or scrimmages in golf.
2. A golf match may not begin prior to the end of the school day with the exception of post-season tournaments.
 
F. A maximum of two (2) golf coaches may confer with their golfers between each green and the next tee box so long as there is no delay in play. NOTE: Conversations with or suggestions from any other person is prohibited.
 
G. In the event that a match ends in a tie during the regular-season or post-season competition, a “team sudden-death playoff” will be used.
 
Boys:
1. All six (6) players will play the first playoff hole.
2. The first foursome will include the top two players from each team, the second foursome will include the 3rd and 4th scorers from each team, and the final foursome will include the other two players.
3. The best four (4) scores of each team will count.
4. If the teams are still tied, all players will proceed to the next playoff hole.
 
Girls:
1. All four (4) players will play the first playoff hole.
2. The first twosome will include the top player from each team, the second twosome will include the 2nd place scorer from each team, and the final foursome will include the other players.
3. The best two scores of each team will count in classes A and 2A; the best three scores will count in classes 3A through 6A.
4. If the teams are still tied, all players will proceed to the next playoff hole.
 
H. It is permissible for coaches to use “split squads” during the regular season. However, the use of split squads will count as two (2) of that school’s maximum allowed competitions.
 
I. All golf coaches must complete the GHSA/GSGA online rules clinic for golf or the school will be fined.
 
REGION/AREA TOURNAMENT:
 
A. Each Region/Area tournament will be an 18-hole team event.
1. Details of the tournament will be sent to schools by the local director through the region secretary.
2. Boys:  A school may enter up to six players, with the best four scores counting.
 Girls:  A school may enter up to four players, with the best two scores counting in classes A and 2A and the best three scores counting in classes 3A through 6A.
3. The Region/Area Tournament Director will submit Electronically the “Region Golf - Report of Winners” upon completion of the tournament. The “Report of Winners” and the “Contestants List” also must be sent by the Region/Area Tournament Director to the specific classification’s Sectional Tournament Director. The deadline for submission of all these reports is 9:00 a.m., on April 27, 2015.
 
B. Each Region/Area tournament will have an individual competition in addition to the team competition.
1. The Low Medalist will advance to the State Tournament even if his team does not advance to the Sectional or State Tournament.
2. The lowest scoring individual (boy and girl) whose team does not qualify out of the Region/Area Tournament shall advance to the Sectional Tournament, provided the player posts a qualifying score: Boys - 85 or better; Girls - 100 or better.
3. Schools who do not have a regular girls golf team may enter one girl in the girls Region/Area Tournament to compete for individual honors.
 
C. Playing distances for Region/Area Tournaments shall be: Boys - 6200 yards; Girls - 5100 yards.
 
SECTIONAL TOURNAMENT:
 
A. Advancement regulations for classes 2A through 6A teams:
1. Region tournament winners posting a qualifying score will advance directly to the State Tournament.
2. Region tournament winners NOT posting a qualifying score will advance to the Sectional Tournament.
3. Teams finishing second, third or fourth in each region with a qualifying score will advance to the Sectional Tournament.
4. Teams finishing second, third or fourth in each region but NOT posting a qualifying score will not advance and will be eliminated from further post-season competition.
5. Qualifying scores:
 Boys    Girls
 330  (AAAAAA)  300 (3 scores)
 340  (AAAAA)  330 (3 scores)
 350  (AAA, AAAA)  330 (3 scores)
 360  (AA)  220 (2 scores)
6. In Classes 2A through 6A, if less than 16 teams post qualifying scores, the Executive Director may fill the tournament field by adding second-place teams (or even third-place or fourth-place teams in rank order).
 
B. Area champions in Class A (public/private) will advance to the State Tournament. Second, third and fourth place teams will compete in the Sectional Tournament for the remaining positions in the State Tournament.
 
STATE TOURNAMENT:
 
A. The State Golf Tournaments in all classifications will be held on Monday, May 18, 2015.
1. All State Tournaments shall be 18-hole events.
2. Details of the state tournaments will be sent to the schools involved by the respective tournament directors or the GHSA office.
3. Substitutions from the Region/Area and from the Sectional Tournament to the State Tournament must be submitted to the Tournament Director no later than 6:00 p.m., the evening before the State Final.
 
B. All State Tournament sites will be marked and prepared by the Tournament Director and the host club’s golf professional. The Georgia State Golf Association will provide officials for the State Tournament to answer questions regarding the rules of Golf.
 
C. Playing distances for StateTournaments shall be: Boys - 6500 yards; Girls - 5500 yards.
 
D. Each school will pay an entry fee to participate in the GHSA State Tournament as follows:
1. Boys teams: $120.00; Girls teams: $80.00; Individual qualifiers: $20.00.
2. The checks are to be made payable to the golf course to help cover their costs and lost revenue.
 
E. A listing of the 2015 State Tournament sites will be posted on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net).
   
SECTION 7
GYMNASTICS - GIRLS

(2014-15)

 
GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. Girls gymnastics is a state championship event open to schools in all classifications.
1. Competition in all meets will be held in the following events:
 (a) Balance Beam
 (b) Uneven Parallel Bars
 (c) Vaulting
 (d) Floor Exercise
 (e) All-Around (competition in preceding four events)
2. The order of competition will be determined by block style.
3. Open scoring will be used.
4. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
 
B. The GHSA gymnastics meets will be played according to the rules published by the National Federation of State High School Associations with such GHSA modifications as may be found in this section.
 
C. Each school desiring to participate in gymnastics must file its intent by May 1 of the preceding year by filing the form found on the GHSA web site.
 
D. The number of gymnastic meets allowed is 10 regular-season meets plus one invitational tournament.
1. The state elimination series does not count in these meets.
2. An invitational tournament is defined as a competition involving more than three teams.
3. All invitational tournaments must be approved by the GHSA Executive Director.
4. Only two meets per week may be scheduled.
5. In accordance with GHSA By-Laws, only one night before a school day per week may be used for competitions beginning at 6:00 p.m. or later
6. All teams and gymnasts (except when prevented by injury) must participate in a minimum of three (3) GHSA sanctioned varsity meets and/ or invitational meets during the season in order to be eligible to participate in the state Preliminary Meet.  Exception: If the gymnast did not meet the number of meets due to injury, then a doctor’s signed statement with the dates missed must be provided prior to the Preliminary Meet.
 
E. There will be no interscholastic practice and/or scrimmages.
 
F. No exhibitions are permitted during seasonal or invitational meets.
 
G. Touch warm-ups are not permitted.
 
H. In accordance with NFHS rules, the GHSA limits the number of participants a school may enter in a meet as follows:
1. For regular season meets, the limit is five (5) participants per event.
2. For invitational meets during the regular season, the limit is four (4) participants per event.
3. For post-season meets, the limit is four (4) participants per event (including the All-Around competition).
 
I. All gymnastics coaches are required to attend a GHSA rules clinic as specified in the GHSA By-Laws.
 
PRELIMINARY MEET:
 
A. A Preliminary (qualifying) Meet will be held April 18, 2015 at Dunwoody High School with the first session beginning at 10:00 a.m., and the second session beginning at approximately 1:00 p.m.
 
B. Minimum scores must be earned during the regular season meets to qualify for the Preliminary Meet as follows:
1. Any team that scores a 96.0 or better during the regular season will automatically qualify.
2. An all-around score of 34.0 or better during the regular season will qualify a gymnast.
3. An individual score of 8.50 or better during the regular season will qualify a gymnast.
 
C. A team’s minimum score is determined by compiling the top three (3) individual event scores.
 
D. Meet results that meet the minimum scores during the regular season are to be signed by a certified judge(s).
 
E. The general information, entry form and roster form may be found on the GHSA website.
 
F. Schools that do not meet the entry form deadline will not be able to enter the Preliminary Meet.
 
G. All participants must qualify in the Preliminary Meet to advance to the State Finals.
 
H. No substitutions may be made after the Preliminary Meet.
 
I. Schools that qualify for the Preliminary Meet, but do not attend, will be fined by the GHSA.
 
STATE MEET
 
A. The State Meet will be held on Friday, April 24, 2015, at Westminster School.
1. The GHSA Coordinator for Gymnastics is Dr. Lucia Norwood (e-mail: luebella@bellsouth.net).
2. The admission fee for the Preliminary Meet and the State Meet is $7.00 for each event.
 
B. A spring floor will be used at the Preliminary Meet and at the State Meet.
 
C. In all Preliminary and State Meets, expenses are paid from the gross gate receipts, including the cost of officials, and the balance is sent to the GHSA Office.
 
SECTION 8
LACROSSE

(2014-15)

 
GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. Lacrosse is a classified event with two state championships (class 6A and the combined A through 5A).
 
B. All Lacrosse games will be played according to the rules published by the National Federation (boys) or US Lacrosse (girls) with such GHSA modifications as may be found in this section.
 
C. Notification of entry in Lacrosse must be filed in writing with the GHSA office no later than May 1, for the upcoming school year so that teams may be placed in Areas for competition.
 
D. The number of Lacrosse matches allowed will be 18 (head-to-head or tournament competition) not including Area and other post-season competition. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
 
E. All GHSA Lacrosse matches shall be played with a minimum of two officially-dressed officials who are registered under the GHSA plan for registration of officials.
 
F. In accordance with GHSA By-Laws, only one night before a school day per week may be used with competitions beginning at 6:00 p.m. or later.
1. For evening games, a single game must begin no later than 7:30 p.m.
2. For evening games, a double-header must begin no later than 6:00 p.m.
 
G. Sub-varsity matches will be limited as follows:
1. Boys will play four 10-minute quarters.
2. Girls will play two 20-minute halves.
3. No overtimes will be played in sub-varsity competition.
 
H. When there is a competitive imbalance between two teams in a contest, the match will be shortened as follows:
1. If a team is ten (10) or more goals down at halftime, the second half will be played with a running clock that will stop only for timeouts.
2. If a team is ten (10) or more goals down at any point in the second half, the match will be played from that point with a running clock that will only stop for timeouts.
3. If the team that is behind in the second half draws within ten (10) goals, the match will return to normal clock operation.
 
I. Matches that are tied at the end of regulation will be handled according to the procedures outlined in the appropriate rule book as follows:
1. BOYS:  Any match that ends in a tie will be resolved by playing a sudden victory overtime period as outlined in Rule 3-4 of the NFHS Boys Lacrosse Rules Book.
2. GIRLS:  Regular season matches between teams of different Lacrosse classifications that are tied at the end of regulation play will end in a tie unless both coaches agree and inform the officials before the match begins that they will play an overtime procedure. For teams of the same Lacrosse classification, overtime will be played according to overtime rules published by US Lacrosse and endorsed by the NFHS.
 (a) The teams will play two (2) overtime periods of three (3) minutes each.
 (b) If the score is tied at the end of the second overtime period, a third overtime period will be played and  the first team to score will be declared the winner.
 (c) This format will also be used in all tournaments where advancement is necessary.
 
J. Teams arriving late for a scheduled contest by thirty (30) minutes or more shall forfeit the match, and shall be responsible for payment of the officials unless prior arrangements are made in a timely manner. Consideration will be given to emergency situations over which the traveling school has no control. The host school has the responsibility of notifying the officials of any changes in the schedule.
 
AREA COMPETITION:
 
A. Each Area shall have a written tie-breaker procedure in order to seed teams for the playoffs.
 
B. An Area may choose to use the GHSA tie-breaker procedure:
1. Winning percentage against all teams in the Area
2. Head-to-head competition among the teams that are tied
3. Goals allowed in head-to-head competition between teams that are tied
4. Goal differential in head-to-head competition between teams that are tied (maximum of 10 goals per game).
5. Goals allowed in all Area games
6. Goal differential in all Area games (maximum of 10 goals per game).
7. At any point in the process where ties can be broken so that only two teams remain tied, consideration of  head-to-head competition will be invoked. If the tie is completely broken for all teams involved at any step in  the process, the tie-breaker process is completed
 
C. If the Area is subdivided, then the same tie-breaker procedure should be used for both subdivisions.
 
POST-SEASON COMPETITION:
 
A. If championship matches end with a tie score, the rulebook procedure for breaking that tie is followed (see Lacrosse Section I).
 
B. Admission must be charged for all playoff games and the admission fee is $7.00.
 
C. Finances:
1. The GHSA will receive 12% of the gross gate receipts.
2. Officials will be paid by the host schools out of the gate receipts.
3. The visiting team’s mileage will be paid at .80 per mile one way.
4. Any remaining receipts will be shared by the participating teams.
5. Host school(s) will be responsible for security, facility fees, maintenance costs, etc., and these expenses will not be taken out of gate receipts.
 
D. In order to host a state playoff match, the host school must be able to provide the following:
1. seating for 700 attendees (calculated at 24 inches per seat)
2. adequate restroom facilities for the size of the crowd
3. a dressing room or locker room for the visiting team
 
E. The GHSA Coordinator for Lacrosse is Jay Watts, Westminster School (404-609-6276 or e-mail at jaywatts@westminster.net).
 
SECTION 9
RIFLERY

(2014-15)

 
GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. Air riflery is a state championship co-ed event open to GHSA schools of all classifications.
1. Each school desiring to participate in riflery must file its intent by February 1, of the preceding school year by filing the form found on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net).
2. Following notification of entry, each school will be assigned to an Area for competition that will be overseen by an Area chairperson.  Teams will be notified of Area assignments when the total number of teams entering have been determined.
3. Contestants in riflery must be certified as being eligible through the GHSA Office. All rifle team athletes must have a sports physical on file at the school.
4. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
5. JROTC programs may use school rifle team members in JROTC program competitive events.  The athletes must be currently enrolled in JROTC and be entered as a JROTC unit and not as a school team. They may not enter competitions or tournaments unless there is a JROTC competition category.
 
B. Competitions will be Open Class,which permits use of Precision or Sporter Class equipment using Precision air rifle rules.  The latest edition of the “NATIONAL STANDARD THREE-POSITION AIR RIFLE RULES” (published by the National Three-Position Air Rifle Council, Camp Perry, P. O. Box 576, Port Clinton, OH  43452 - also available on website: http://www.odcmp.com/3p/Rulebook.htm) will govern all GHSA matches except the following:
1. The course of fire will be the team event 4x3x10.  All matches will be shoulder to shoulder.  Postal matches will not be accepted.  Team members will be distributed equally between relays if more than one relay is used.
2. Except at the State Championship, Sectional and Semifinal competitions, the coach may assist team members (without disturbing other shooters), but may not physically assist the shooters in loading, cocking or adjusting the sights.
3. The "two scorers" referred to in National Standard Rule 8.3 will consist of a scorer from each team if outside scorers with no interest in the outcome are not used.
4. The amount of protest period time (Rule 8.2) should be established by each Rifle Area prior to start of season or agreed upon by both coaches prior to the beginning of the match.
5. The following safety regulations are mandatory for ALL competitions, training and practices: Clear Barrel Indicators (CBIs) will be in all rifles when not firing. They will be inserted in the rifle when taken out of storage or cases.  The CBI must visibly extend beyond both ends of the barrel when installed. The CBIs may be removed only during preparation and changeover periods, sighting or record firing times. They will be reinserted after each position stage. CBIs must be inserted anytime someone goes forward of the firing line or removes their rifle from the firing line.
 
C. Each Area shall draw up schedules for each team in the Area.
1. Each Area schedule must be filed with the GHSA Office.
2. The home or host schools should fax or e-mail team and individual scores to the area chairperson by the next day after completion of the match.
3. Four competitors comprise a team but five may be used in post-season GHSA competition with the top four (4) scores counting as the team score.  Areas may organize regular-season competitions as they elect in regard to the number of team members involved as long as the top four (4) scores count as the school's team score.
4. Standings will be determined by won-loss results.  A team may compete against only one other team in a given regular season match.  Ties will be broken using National Standard Rule 8.6.  If tie breaking rules are exhausted and the match is still tied, the match will be scored as a tie and each team credited with one-half win and one-half loss.  In cases of identical won-loss records, the results of their season competition against each other will determine standings.  If still tied then a shoot-off match will be held.
5. Before the start of the regular season, the Area will establish structure for determining Area winners and Sectional seedings.  The Area will also appoint an appeals committee to handle protests and appeals in area playoff competitions.  NOTE:  Decisions by the Area Appeals Committee may be appealed to the Executive Director when it is believed that Area procedures have been violated.
6. Area competition must be completed by March 7, 2015.  Final Area standings must be reported to both the State Director and the GHSA office no later than March 10, 2015.
 
SECTIONAL COMPETITION:
 
A. The first six teams (four member teams) in each Area will advance to the Sectionals to be fired on March 14, 2015, or earlier if agreed upon by both Area chairpersons involved.  The Area chairperson of the top three seeded teams in his/her area will coordinate the matches and report the results to both the State Director and to the GHSA office not later than March 17, 2015.  Sectional and Semifinal brackets can be found in Appendix B.
 
SEMIFINAL COMPETITION:
 
A. The twenty-four (24) teams winning the Sectional competition will advance to the State Semifinal competitions to be fired on March 21, 2015 or earlier if agreed upon by both Area chairpersons involved. The Area chairpersons will coordinate the matches. All chairpersons will report the results and all individual qualifiers to both the State Director and to the GHSA office not later than March 23, 2015. TEAMS AND ALL QUALIFYING INDIVIDUALS MUST BE REPORTED FOR THEM TO COMPETE IN THE STATE CHAMPIONSHIP.
 
STATE COMPETITION:
 
A. The twelve (12) teams winning the Semifinal competitions and the two (2) teams with the highest losing scores in the Semifinals qualify to compete at the State Championship.  Any ties to break to determine the two additional teams to advance to the championship (identical high losing scores) will be broken with another match to be fired on March 25 or earlier if agreed upon by Area chairpersons involved.  The higher-seeded team will host. If teams have the same seeding, a coin toss will determine the host site.  Each of the participating school’s teams will enter a four-member team with all shooters’ scores to count for the total team score.  These four individuals also qualify for the state individual competition.  All other GHSA competitors firing a 290 or better in a regular season GHSA Area match or in the Sectionals or Semifinals also qualify for the state individual competition if their team does not qualify.  Schools with more than four competitors with the 290 or better qualification may use four of these competitors as a team plus their additional qualifiers may compete for the individual championship.
 
B. Finals procedures will be used in determining the state individual standings but will have no effect on team standings.  Finals will begin approximately 30 minutes after the end of the regular state competition.
 
C. The State Riflery Championship will be held on April 4, 2015, at Fort Benning.
The GHSA State Coordinator for Rifley is Major Larry Pendergrass (retired) - 770-922-7871; email address:  riflesix@comcast.net. The State Championship Director is John Skinner - 770-301-4074; email: jskinner@numail.org.
 
SECTION 10
SOCCER

(2014-15)

 
GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. Soccer is a state championship event for boys and girls played in the Spring season.  Schools in classes 2A through 6A are aligned in Regions, while Class A schools are aligned in Areas.
 
B. All soccer matches will be played according to the rules published by the National Federation, and all National Federation recommendations for “State Adoption” have been adopted by the GHSA. Sub-varsity matches are limited to 35-minute halves.
 
C. Notification of entry in Class A Soccer must be filed in writing with the GHSA Office no later than May 1, for the upcoming school year so that teams may be placed into Areas for competition. All other classifications are structured according to regions.
 
D. The number of soccer matches allowed (not including state tournaments) shall be eighteen (18). If a region/area chooses to play a region/area tournament, those matches must be included as part of the 18-game total allowed. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
 
E. All GHSA varsity soccer matches shall be played with one or more officially-dressed officials who are registered under the GHSA plan for the registration of officials.
 
F. In accordance with By-Law 2.66, only one night before a school day per week may be used with competitions beginning at 6:00 p.m. or later.
1. For evening matches, a single match must start no later than 7:30 p.m.
2. For evening matches, a double-header must start no later than 6:00 p.m.
 
G. Teams arriving late for a contest by thirty (30) minutes or more shall forfeit the match, and shall pay the officials unless prior arrangements are made in a timely manner, and both teams agree to start the game late or reschedule it.  Consideration will also be given to emergency situations over which the traveling school has no control.  The host school has the responsibility of notifying the officials of these changes.
 
H. A student may not participate in more than three (3) halves of soccer per day except in a tournament setting, when a player may play two full matches in a calendar day.
 
I. During regular season competition played between teams of different classifications, there will be no overtime procedure invoked when regulation play ends with a tie score, unless both coaches agree and inform the match officials prior to the start of the match. During regular season competition between schools in the same classification, and during region/area and state playoff competition, the overtime procedure listed below with be invoked:
1. The overtime will consist of two (2) five-minute periods.
2. If the score remains tied following the overtime periods, a “shootout” of penalty kicks will determine the winner.
3. A coin toss shall take place to determine which team will put the ball in play for the first overtime period.
 
J. In accordance with the National Federation allowance for a state adoption (Rule 7-2), when there is a competitive imbalance between the teams, the match will be shortened as follows:
1. If a team is seven (7) or more goals down at the midpoint of the first half, that will be considered the end of the half, and the teams will play a twenty (20) minute second half.
2. If a team is seven (7) or more goals behind at halftime, the second half will be restricted to twenty (20) minutes.
3. When a team is ten (10) or more goals behind in the second half, the game will be terminated.
 
K. All soccer matches between schools from the same classification must be played to completion. Matches that are interrupted by weather or mechanical difficulties will be replayed from the point of interruption unless the team that is behind chooses not to complete the match.
 
L. In accordance with GHSA By-Laws, soccer coaches will be required to attend a GHSA rules clinic.  Failure to do so will result in a fine for the school for each coach who does not attend.
 
REGION/AREA COMPETITION:
 
A. Region or Area Tie-Breaking Procedure (to use for seeding purposes):
1. Record against all teams in the Area.
2. Winning team in head-to-head competition between schools that are tied.
3. Goals allowed in head-to-head competition between schools that are tied.
4. Goal differential in head-to-head competition between schools that are tied (maximum of three (3) goals per game).
5. Goals allowed in all Area games
6. Goal differential in all Area games (maximum of three (3) goals per game). NOTE: When figuring “goals allowed” and “goal differential” in matches decided by penalty kicks, the winning team will have one (1) goal added to its game score and the losing team will have no goals added regardless of the number of penalty kicks that were made by either team.
7. In any step of the tie-breaking process if a three-way tie is broken so that all ties are broken, that step determines the placements. If two teams remain tied after a step is completed, revert back to head-to-head record to break the tie. If the tie cannot be broken, move to the next step.
 
B. If Region/Areas sub-divide into Sub-Regions/Sub-Areas, then the same tie-breaking procedures (A1 through A7) should be used substituting the word “Sub-Area” for “Area.”
 
C. For Area and State competition, if the score is still tied at the end of the second overtime period, the penalty kick procedure will be used to determine the winner.
 
D. Financial procedures for all Region/Area playoffs will be determined by the Region/Area. The host school is responsible for payment of officials.  The admission fees for State playoffs begin immediately after Region/Area winners are determined.
 
E. PENALTY KICK PROCEDURE:
The teams will go into a penalty kick “shootout” immediately after the two (2) five-minute overtime procedure has taken place, if a tie score still exists.
1. The head referee shall choose the goal at which the penalty kicks will be taken.
2. Each coach will select any five eligible players (including goalkeeper) to take the kicks.
3. A coin toss shall be held with the team winning the toss having the choice of kicking first or last.
4. Teams will alternate kickers, and there is no follow-up on the kicks.
5. The defending team may change goalkeepers prior to each kick.
6. Following the five (5) kicks from each team, the teams with the greater number of successful kicks will be given one (1) point and declared the winner.
7. If the same number of penalty kicks are successful for each team, each coach will select five (5) different eligible players who will kick in a “sudden victory” situation.  NOTE:  Each team will have an opportunity to kick in each round of the “sudden victory” situation.
8. If there is no “sudden victory” after the five (5) kicks, keep repeating the process until a winner is determined.
 
STATE COMPETITION:
 
A. Four teams from each Region in classes 2A through 6A, and three teams from each Area in class A, will advance to the state tournament.
1. Region/Area winners must be determined by April 22, 2015.
2. It is the responsibilities of the host team to furnish game balls beyond those furnished by the GHSA
3. In the event that two schools involved can not agree on the arrangements for the series (dates, times, etc.) the GHSA Executive Director will make a ruling to cover the situation.
4. Prior to the final round, the higher seeded team will host, unless the competing teams have the same seeding. In that case, the (H) printed on the bracket will designate the host team.
5. All Championship games will be played at Kennesaw State University May 14-16, 2015 and the home team will be determined by the “H” in the bracket. Admission will be $12.00 per day.
 The Championship schedule for 2015 is as follows:
       Thursday, May 14       Friday, May 15       Saturday, May 16
 12:00 pm - Class A Girls 12:00 pm - Class 2A Girls 12:00 pm - Class 3A Girls
   2:30 pm - Class A Boys   2:30 pm - Class 2A Boys   2:30 pm - Class 3A Boys
   5:00 pm - Class 4A Girls   5:00 pm - Class 5A Girls   5:00 pm - Class 6A Girls
   7:30 pm - Class 4A Boys   7:30 pm - Class 5A Boys   7:30 pm - Class 6A Boys
 
B. Finances:
1. The GHSA will receive 12% of the gross gate receipts.
2. A pre-set amount for game officials fees will be sent to the GHSA office, along with the 12% of gross gate receipts,and the GHSA office will be responsible for paying the officials.
3. The visiting team shall be paid $.80 per mile (one way) for travel.
4. After these three expenses are paid the schools involved will share the remaining gate receipts equally.
5. The host school is responsible for security, facility fees, maintenance costs, etc., and these expenses shall not be taken out of gate receipts.
 
C. Admission must be charged at all playoff games.  Beginning immediately after Area winners are determined, fees for single playoff games prior to the Championship Finals are $7.00 for adults, and $5.00 for students high school and under, for pre-sale only when applicable. All fees at the gate will be $7.00. Doubleheaders will be $10.00.
 
D. In order to host a state playoff game, the following site requirements must be met:
1. Seating requirements (seats at 24 inches each):
 A:  750,    AA:  750,   AAA:  1,000,   AAAA:  1,500,   AAAAA & AAAAAA:  2,000
2. Adequate restroom facilities must be provided
3. Dressing area must be provided for the visiting team
4. The playing area must be configured in such a way that spectators must enter through an admission gate.
5. The field must be sufficiently lighted to allow for night play for all semifinal and championship matches.
6. Championships matches will be held at centralized sites.
 
E. In the post-season tournaments, it is necessary to have team benches located on the same side of the field.  This will be true even in situations where fans are kept on opposite sides of the field.
 
SECTION 11
SOFTBALL

(2014-15)

GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. Fast Pitch softball is a state championship event organized on a Region basis in six classifications.  In Class A, there will be separate championships for public and private schools. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
 
B. All softball games will be played by the rules as published by the National Federation of State High School Associations.
 
C. The number of softball games allowed (not including region or state tournaments) shall be:  twenty-eight (28) games either in head-to-head competition or in invitational tournaments.
1. Region tournaments shall be structured so that no school will play more than eight (8) games in that tournament.
2. Schools may not enter any softball tournament other than the region tournament or state elimination series unless such tournament has been approved by the GHSA Executive Director.
3. Sub-varsity teams are allowed to play 70 percent of their respective varsity team’s regular season games. Sub-varsity teams shall not schedule a sub-varsity tournament after they have reached their 70 percent game restriction.
 
D. All varsity softball games shall be played with officially-dressed umpires who are registered under the GHSA plan for the registration of officials. The assignment of officials for regular-season games, invitational tournaments, and sub-region and region tournaments will be made by the GHSA office.
1. The GHSA will assign one or more associations to each school for their games.
2. The school and the local association(s) will sign a contract for the games that are assigned.
 
E. In accordance with GHSA By-Laws, only one night before a school day per week may be used with competitions beginning at 6:00 p.m., or later.
 
F. The following rule “State Adoptions” have been approved for GHSA play in softball:
1. The game will end when:
 (a) a team has completed three turns at bat and is fifteen (15) runs behind.
 (b) a team has completed four turns at bat and is twelve (12) runs behind.
 (c) a team has completed five or more turns at bat and is eight (8) runs behind.
2. The courtesy runner rule has been adopted. NOTE:  Participation as a courtesy runner does not constitute entry into the game, and does not count as a game played.
3. The use of a double first base is allowed.
4. The suspended game rule will be used.
 (a) When a game is stopped before it becomes a legal game, it is considered to be “no contest” and any replay will begin from the first inning.
 (b) When a game is stopped after it becomes a legal game and a winner can be determined, the game is completed.
 (c) When a game is stopped after it becomes a legal game and a winner can not be determined, any replay will begin from the point of interruption.
5. Termination of the game due to weather, unplayable conditions, or mechanical malfunctions:
 (a)  The umpires may halt play for up to two (2) hours when conditions do not allow play to continue.
  1.  The two-hour interruption(s) is cumulative
  2.  The game must be terminated when the two-hour time period has elapsed. If the first game of a  doubleheader is terminated, the second game will be postponed.
  3.  The two-hour period does not include time needed to prepare the field for the resumption of play.
 (b)  Umpires must wait for at least 30 minutes before terminating a game for unplayable field conditions.
6. In any softball game, if a team does not show up within 30 minutes of the scheduled game time, a forfeit shall be declared unless the delay is unavoidable and the visiting team notifies the home team. In emergency situations, the game may be started late, or may be rescheduled.
     7. The tie-breaker procedure for extra-inning games will be used. Procedure: At the beginning of the eighth inning (and all subsequent half-innings), the player who was the last batter in the previous inning is placed on second base and regular rules apply thereafter. The game continues until a winner is determined.
8. Only game-essential personnel are permitted within the confines of the team’s dugout and shall be held to the same level of accountability as the coaching staff and players.
9. Sub-varsity games may have a time limit instead of playing seven innings as long as the guidelines are agreed upon before the start of the game.
10. Varsity games played in invitational tournaments may have time limits as follows:
 (a)  No game may be less than five innings regardless of the time limit (4.5 innings if home team is ahead.)
 (b) No time limit may be less than 90 minutes.
 (c) If the game is tied when the time limit expires, the International Tie-breaker must be implemented until a winner is determined.
 
G. Teams may have try-outs that are limited to a maximum of five consecutive school days between May 1 and the last day students are in school. Students must be enrolled at that school or an 8th grader at a feeder school for the member school.
 
 
REGION TOURNAMENTS:
 
A. The dates, times and sites for Region tournaments will be determined by each Region and must be submitted to the GHSA office no later than 9:00 a.m., on Monday, September 22, 2014.
 
B. Each region will determine its teams advancing to the First Round no later than October 11, 2014, with the top four teams advancing to the First Round in classes 2A through 6A. Teams advancing to the First Round must be submitted to the GHSA office no later than 9:00 a.m., on Monday, October 13, 2014.  In Class A, teams will advance to the playoffs based on a power rating system.
 
C. Region post-season games (play-in games, sub-region games, region tournament games) must have a minimum of two (2) games played on each field, with the exception of a championship game.
 
STATE TOURNAMENT:
 
A. For the First and Second Rounds, teams will play a best-of-three series at the site of the higher seed.
1. There will be a doubleheader on the first day and an “if” game on the second day.
2. The host team will be the “home” team for the first game of the series and the visiting team wille be “home” team for the second game. A coin flip will be used to determine the “home” team for the third game, if necessary.
3. Teams that win the Second Round series will advance to the Elite Eight of the State Tournament.
 
B. The Elite Eight of the State Tournament will be a double-elimination tournament held in Columbus, Georgia on October 30-November 1, 2014.
 
C. Finances for all state playoffs are handled as follows:
1. Admission must be charged at all playoff games. For First and Second Rounds, the admission price for a doubleheader will be $7.00, and $5.00 for a single game. For the Elite Eight of the State Tournament, the admission price will be $10.00 per day.
2. The GHSA will receive 12% of the gross gate receipts at all state playoff games.
3. In the First and Second Rounds, the umpires will be paid out of gross receipts (Note: If the gross receipts are not sufficient to pay the umpires, the host school will pay that cost.) The remaining balance is to be divided with 60% of the proceeds going to the visiting team and 40% to the host team.
4. Each team is allowed free entrance for up to 20 players, managers and bench personnel. Schools desiring more than this number to be admitted, must pay the admission price. Only GHSA passes, GAOA membership cards and valid media passes will be honored for free admission.
5. Teams are responsible for their own travel and housing expenses, but housing will be arranged by the Columbus Sports Council for the State Tournament in Columbus.
 
D. All umpires and scorers will be provided by the GHSA.
 
E. Times posted with the brackets are approximate. Teams should be ready to take the field for play at the time indicated for each game.
1. The top team in each bracket uses the first base dugout unless a team is playing consecutive games on the same field.
2. The home team will be determined for each game with a coin toss.
3. Lineups should be submitted to the official scorer at least 15 minutes prior to the scheduled starting time.
4. Teams may not use game fields for batting practice.
5. All teams advancing to the Elite Eight of the State Tournament are required to be present and in uniform at the Opening Ceremonies. Failure to comply with result in a $100 fine to the school.
 
F. The outfield fence will be set at 200’ from home plate for the State Tournament in Columbus.
 
SECTION 12

GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. Swimming and Diving is a classified event with two state championships (class 6A and the combined class A through 5A).
1. Boys and girls compete for separate championships in each class.
2. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
3. The maximum number of contests for swimming is ten (10) exclusive of the state meet.
4. For divers, the maximum number of dual meet competitions is as follows:
(a) Six-dive format: ten (10) competitions AND/OR
(b) Eleven-dive format: five (5) competitions
5. Only one meet may be held per week on a night preceding a school day.  A night meet is defined as beginning at 6:00 p.m., or later.
 6. It is permissible for coaches to use “split squads” during the regular season. However, the use of split   squads will count as two (2) of that school’s maximum allowed competitions.
 
B. The National Federation Swimming Rules shall be the official rules for all GHSA competitions with the exception of any special regulations found in this section.
 
C. In those school systems where facilities are limited and one coach is hired to coach more than one high school team, or coaches from several schools use the same facility, the gathering of these students for practice purposes will not violate GHSA regulations.  Competitions between schools during these practice sessions must be avoided unless they are counted within the number of allowable contests.
 
D. Each school with a participating student(s) must have a school representative present at all GHSA meets.
 
E. ORDER OF EVENTS:  (boys events precede girls events)
 
1. 200-yard Medley Relay    7. 100-yard Freestyle
2. 200-yard Freestyle     8. 500-yard Freestyle
3. 200-yard Individual Medley    9. 200-yard Freestyle Relay
4.   50-yard Freestyle         10. 100-yard Backstroke
5. 1 Meter Diving          11. 100-yard Breaststroke
6. 100-yard Butterfly          12. 400-yard Freestyle Relay

 
STATE MEET (GENERAL INFORMATION):
 
A. In order to participate in the State Swimming and Diving Meet:
1. A participant must qualify at a meet governed by National Federation and GHSA rules.
2. Qualifying times are listed at the end of this section, and entry deadlines must be met.
3. Proof of Performance (POP) for swimming events must be verified by two GHSA coaches who are in attendance at that meet.
 
B. All eligible relay swimmers must be listed on the entry form.  It shall not count as an entry unless the competitor actually competes in the event.  Any individual listed on the entry form may swim in the prelims, swim-offs, and/or finals provided he does not exceed the permitted entry limit for the meet.
 
C. Qualifying standards for the State Meet will be established by the GHSA Executive Director.
 
D. A coaches’ meeting will be held at the site preceding both the diving  competition and the swimming competition.
 
E. Only the coaches/faculty members listed on the entry form will have access to the pool deck.
 
F. Rules and Restrictions for Meet Entries:
1. A school may enter only one (1) relay team per event.
2. A school may not have more than four (4) entries in an event in which the contestants compete as individuals.
3. A contestant may enter a maximum of four (4) events, no more than two (2) of which are individual events.
 
G. No team points will be allowed to a swimmer or relay team if the qualifying standard for that event is not met or bettered in either the prelims or the finals.  No team points will be awarded to divers if they do not equal or better the qualifying point total for eleven (11) dives.
 
H. Reservation of seating space for spectators is not allowed.
 
I. The 2014-15 State Swimming & Diving Championships will be held at the Campus Recreation Center on the campus of the Georgia Institute of Technology in the following format:
 
Feb. 5, 2015 9:00 a.m. Diving Finals – A through 5A (warmup at 7:00 a.m.)
Feb. 5, 2015 3:00 p.m. Diving Finals – AAAAAA (warmup at 1:00 p.m.)

Feb. 6, 2015 9:00 a.m. Swim Prelims – A through 5A (warmup at 7:00 a.m.)
 Feb. 6, 2015 6:30 p.m. Swim Prelims – AAAAAA (warmup at 5:00 p.m.)
  
 Feb. 7, 2015 1:00 p.m. Swim Finals – A through 5A (warmup at 11:00 a.m.)
 Feb. 7, 2015 6:00 p.m. Swim Finals – AAAAAA (warmup at 4:30 p.m.)
 

J. Team championships will be determined by scoring sixteen (16) places as noted in the National Federation Swimming Rule Book.  The top eight (1-8) qualifiers will compete in the championship heat, and the next eight (9-16) will compete in the consolation heat.
 
K. The lead-off 50-yard Freestyle split in the 200-yard Freestyle Relay, and the lead-off 100-yard Freestyle split in the 400-yard Freestyle Relay will be considered for State records in their respective events.  NOTE:  If the relay team is disqualified for any reason, the lead-off time will not count for qualifying or for a state record.
 
L. Admission fee for the GHSA State Swimming and Diving Championship is $12.00 per day.
 
M. Free admission will be allowed for the following:  1. Swimmers and divers qualified and entered in the State Meet; 2. Coaches that are listed on the Swimming and Diving Coaches list; 3. Four girls and four boys designated as substitutes by the coach on the team list; 4. Two team attendants or trainers as listed on the team roster; 5. Those normally allowed free admission, such as with GHSA passes, will continue to be admitted by signing the pass list.
 
STATE MEET (ELIGIBILITY/PROCEDURES):

DIVING
 

A. A diver may become eligible for the State Meet using a 6-dive sheet or an 11-dive sheet.
1) 6-DIVE FORMAT:  This format is slightly different than the normal 6-dive dual meet format as defined in the NFHS Rules Book.  If the 6-dive format is utilized and submitted, the first dive will continue to be from the group as specified by the NFHS and in the NFHS Rules Book.  The first dive will maintain its assigned degree of difficulty, unless it is more than 1.8, in which case it will receive no more than 1.8 degree of difficulty.  Dives 2-6 shall be one dive from each of the five (5) groups (forward, backward, reverse, inward, and twisting).  The degree of difficulty of dives 2-6 when totaled shall be equal to or greater than 10.4 for both boys and girls.  The score to be achieved must be 200 points or more.
2) 11-DIVE FORMAT:  If the 11-dive format is utilized and submitted, it shall be on the official 11-dive sheet.  For girls, the minimum degree of difficulty for optional dives shall be 11.5 when totaled, and the score to be achieved must be 270 points or greater.  For boys, the minimum degree of difficulty for optional dives shall be 12.0 when totaled, and the score to be achieved must be 270 points or greater. NOTE: The official 11-dive Checklist as well as the 6-Dive and 11-Dive Forms can be found on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net).  
 
B.   In both the 6-dive and 11-dive formats, the meet must be scored by at least, but not limited to, three (3) judges.  The official dive sheet that is submitted must be completed with all necessary signatures and information            
 
C.   Proof of Performance:
    
1) Only one Proof of Performance (POP) dive sheet per diver may be submitted by fax (678-395-4475), mail (2010 Willshire Glen, Alpharetta, GA 30009) or scanned and e-mailed (GHSA_diving@hotmail.com).
2)   If the diver’s POP is accepted and approved, the name of the diver and school affiliation will appear on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net). If the POP dive sheet is in any way incorrect, the coach will be notified and one (1) additional POP may be submitted, if desired.
3)   Dive sheets with electronically generated scores will not be accepted.
4) The Proof of Performance must be submitted by 4 p.m., on Thursday, January 29, 2015.
 
D.   State Meet Dive Sheets:
    
1)  The format and criteria required for the state dive sheet shall comply with Section 4 - Choice of Dives that is detailed in the current NFHS Rules Book for championship meets. The sheet must be completed with the signatures, phone number and e-mail address of both the diver and coach.
2)   A diver will be automatically entered in the State Meet upon receipt of the actual dive sheet by the deadline and approval of the dive sheet by the GHSA.
3)   The deadline for changing a dive sheet is 4 p.m., on Wednesday, February 4, 2015.
 
E.   If a school has more than four (4) divers per gender that have been deemed eligible after official approval of the POP dive sheet, the school may submit a maximum of four (4) and only four (4) dive sheets per gender by the deadline.  
 
F. The Meet Director for the State Diving Meet will have jurisdiction over the method of announcing the diving.
 
G. If possible, the championship venue(s) shall provide two (2) hours of practice time to State Meet participants the week of the State Meet.
 
H. Boys will dive first in the odd-numbered years (2015), and girls will dive first in the even-numbered years (2016).
 
I. For questions or concerns about State Meet eligibility and procedures, contact the State Diving Coordinator, Vicky Sanchez Tuymer, (GHSA_diving@hotmail.com).
 
J. The diving information found on the GHSA web site supersedes all other sources of information.
 
SWIMMING:
 
A. Coaches shall submit all of their Proof of Performances on the Georgia High School Swimming Coaches Association (GHSSCA) web site found at www.ghssca.com.  All eligible relay swimmers must be listed on the site.  It shall not count as an entry unless the swimmer actually competes in the event.  Detailed submission instructions are also available on the web site.  At the end of the dual meet season, the web site will be closed to accepting new submissions and time will be given for coaches to make their final entry decisions.  The coach must make the actual entry for the swimmer to compete in the State Meet on the GHSSCA web site by Thursday, January 29, 2015 at 4:00 p.m.
 
B. Qualifying times are as follows:
 
BOYS EVENT GIRLS
 1:51.00 200 yard Medley Relay 2:07.00
 1:55.00 200 yard Freestyle 2:07.00
 2:12.00 200 yard Individual Medley 2:24.00
    23.50  50 yard Freestyle    26.50
    58.00 100 yard Butterfly 1:05.00
    52.00 100 yard Freestyle    58.50
 5:20.00 500 yard Freestyle 5:40.00
 1:40.00 200 yard Freestyle Relay 1:53.00
 1:00.00 100 yard Backstroke 1:06.00
 1:07.00 100 yard Breastroke 1:15.00
 3:44.00 400 yard Freestyle Relay 4:12.00
 
DEADLINES:

SUBJECT DATE TIME
Dive – POP Within 1 week of performance
Swim – POP Within 1 week of performance  
Dive – Last POP Thursday, January 29 9:00 p.m.
Swim – Last POP Thursday, January 29 9:00 p.m.
Dive – Dive sheet for State Wednesday, February 4 4:00 p.m.
Swim – Actual meet entry Friday, January 30 4:00 p.m.
Dive – Changes on State sheet Wednesday, February 4 4:00 p.m.
 

SECTION 13
TENNIS

(2014-15)

GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. Tennis is a team championship sport for boys and girls that is based on Region play in all classifications except for Class A, which is based on Area play and will have separate championships for private and public schools. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
 
B. All tennis matches will be played according to tennis rules published by the U.S. Tennis Association (USTA) unless otherwise specified by the Georgia High School Association.
 
1. The rules of the USTA Handbook relating to lateness for a match will apply to GHSA matches.
2. There will be continuous play except that a coach may talk to players as they change ends of the court after a game, but the players must stay on the court.
3. In regular season play and in the Region/Area  tournament, the 8-game Pro Set format is allowed. The host coach shall notify all opponents of the format to be used at least 24 hours before the competition. 8-Game Pro Set:  First player to win 8 games by a margin of 2 games (ie, 8-5, 8-6, 9-7) wins the set  -  if score gets to 8-8, the tie-breaker as outlined in this section is used.
 
C. Teams are restricted to no more than eighteen (18) varsity matches excluding Region/Area and State tournaments. The 18 matches are for the complete team (singles and doubles). There will be no singles tournaments allowed.
1. Each match played in an invitational tournament or multiple match counts toward the maximum of eighteen (18).
2. No school shall enter any invitational tournament unless it has been approved by the GHSA Executive Director.
3. In accordance with By-Law 2.66, only one night before a school day per week may be used with competitions beginning at 6:00 p.m. or later.
4. It is permissible for coaches to use “split squads” during the regular season. However, the use of split squads
 will count as two (2) of that school’s maximum allowed competitions.
5. There shall be no interscholastic practices and/or scrimmages.
 
D. The format for all GHSA tennis matches shall be three (3) singles matches and two (2) doubles matches. With prior agreement of both coaches, JV squads may use a format of two (2) singles matches and one (1) doubles match.
1. A player may play in either one (1) singles match or one (1) doubles match.
2. No player is permitted to play in both a singles and a doubles match.
3. Substitution is not permitted once a match has begun.  If any injury occurs during play that prevents a player from completing the match, that player defaults and the opponent is awarded the victory.
 
E. 12-Point Tie-Breaker for Singles (Team A vs B)
1. This is used when the score is tied 6-6 (or 8-8 in Pro-Set) in any set (1st, 2nd, or 3rd).
2. Player A serves the first point from the right service area.
3. Player B serves the second and third points from the left and right service areas respectively.
4. Player A serves the fourth and fifth points - again alternating the service areas.
5. Player B serves the next two points and ends of the court are changed between these two points.
6. Player A serves the eighth and ninth points.
7. After this, the serve is alternated on every two points.
8. If the tie-breaker ends with a 6-6 score, the players change ends of the court and alternate serves until one player is ahead by two (2) points - which gives that player a set victory of 7-6.
9. Players switch ends of the court after every six (6) points and at the end of the tie-breaker.
 
F. 12-Point Tie-Breaker for Doubles (Team A & B  vs C & D)
1. Player A serves the first point from the right service area.
2. Player C serves the second and third points - alternating the service areas.
3. Player B serves the fourth and fifth points.
4. Player D serves the sixth and seventh points, and ends of the court are changed between the points.
5. After this, play continues with the same service rotation until one team has either won seven (7) of the first twelve (12) points, or a team established a two-point margin after twelve (12) points have been played.
6. Teams change ends of court after every six (6) points and at the end of the tie-breaker.
 
 
REGION / AREA COMPETITION:
 
A. Each Region/Area will determine how it will choose its top four (4) teams.
1. In classes 2A through 6A, the top 4 Region representatives shall be determined no later than April 18, 2015. In class A, the top four teams from each Area must be determined no later than April 23, 2015.
2. The top four Region teams must be submitted to the GHSA by 9:00 a.m., on April 20, 2015; the top four Area teams must be submitted to the GHSA by 9:00 a.m., on April 24, 2015.
3. Five percent (5%) of the gross gate receipts (if admission is charged) will be sent to the GHSA, and then the Region/Area will decide how to handle expenses and disbursements.
 
B. At the end of the regular season and prior to any post-season play, each coach will submit to the Region/Area tournament director an official playoff roster (form to be found on GHSA website) listing the singles players as Nos. 1, 2, and 3 and the doubles teams as Nos. 1 and 2, in proper order of ability (based on the integrity of the coach).  This roster will be the lineup used in ALL tournament play thereafter, unless an alternate is used under the restrictions listed below.  NOTE:  If no Region/Area tournament is held, the lineup must be submitted to the Region Secretary at the end of the regular season and prior to the start of the state tournament.
1. Stacking of one’s lineup is strictly prohibited in any regular-season match, invitational tournament or state tournament match. An obvious attempt to stack a lineup (i.e., use a player or doubles team below their relative ability level on the team) may result in the immediate disqualification of the entire team.
 (a) For each regular-season match, the coach will choose three players (A, B & C) to play singles and two pairs of players (D1 & D2) to play doubles that day. The best player of A, B and C must play the No. 1 position in singles and the weakest must play No. 3 singles. The best doubles team of D1 and D2 must play No. 1 doubles (Note: Points may only be forfeited beginning with the lower positions and working upward unless an injury or illness occurs after a match has begun).
 (b) It is not stacking to alternate from match to match during the regular season the positions of A and B, B and C, and even A and C if the playes are of relatively equal ability. Likewise, D1 and D2 could alternate if these teams are of relatively equal ability.
 (c) It is not stacking if players alternate from singles to doubles, and vice versa, from match to match during the regular season as long as the singles players being used that day are listed from No. 1 to No. 3 according to relative ability, and the best doubles team being used that day plays at No. 1 doubles.
 (d) A player listed as a singles player on the playoff roster shall not switch over to doubles competitions in any later round, or vice-versa.
2. Designate up to four (4) alternates to be used under the following conditions:
 (a) Alternates should not be better in ability than ANY of the players listed on the playoff roster in the positions of Nos. 1, 2, or 3 singles OR Nos. 1 or 2 doubles.
 (b) Alternates may be used in either singles or doubles competitions, but the same player may not be used for both in the same round of competition.
 (c) No individual alternate may be used more than a total of two (2) times during the cumulative rounds of the sub-region, region, or state tournaments.
 (d) Substitutions made after the official playoff roster has been submitted must be made at the lowest level of singles play with all others moving to the higher level of competition.  In doubles competition, the coach has the option to place the alternate in the open slot or to place the alternate on the No. 2 doubles team and move a player from the No. 2 doubles team to the No. 1 doubles team, if the original vacancy is on the No. 1 team.  A player may never be used in a position lower than his original position.
(e) If the original contestant(s) resumes play, everyone moves back to their original positions listed on the submitted playoff roster.
3. A serious injury, illness, suspension or other conflict MAY warrant a waiver of the anti-stacking restrictions listed above.  Such waivers will be considered on a case-by-case basis upon receipt of proper documentation to the GHSA office, including a letter signed by the school's principal.
4. The objecting school must provide documentation (newspaper articles, scorebooks, or written confirmation from opposing coaches) of any stacking violations.
 
 
STATE TOURNAMENT:
 
A. The State Tournament is considered a continuation of the Region/Area Tournament.
1. Tournaments will be held for both boys teams and girls teams in each classification with separate tournaments for public and private schools in Class A.
2. Trophies shall be presented to the champions and runners-up in each classification - both boys and girls.
3. In order to host a State Tournament match beyond the region level, the host school must have available a minimum of two (2) courts.  Four (4) courts is preferable.
4. All State Tournament matches must be played on composition (hard) surfaces unless the competing schools agree to play on a non-composition surface prior to the matches.
5. In classes 2A through 6A, the First Four (4) Rounds of the State Tournament will take place on the “home” courts of the higher seeded teams with the following schedule: The First Round must be completed no later than April 23, 2015; the Second Round must be completed no later than April 28, 2015;  the Quarterfinal Round must be completed no later than May 2, 2015; and the Semifinal Round must be completed no later than May 6, 2015. If the teams are equal seeds, a coin flip will determine the host school.
6. In class A (public and private schools), the First Three (3) Rounds of the State Tournament will take place on the “home” courts of the higher seeded teams with the following schedule: The First Round must be completed no later than April 28, 2015; the Quarterfinal Round must be completed no later than May 2, 2015; and the Semifinal Round must be completed no later than May 6, 2015. If the teams are equal seeds, a coin flip will determine the host school.
7. In each round of the state playoffs, the following will apply:
 (a) Coaches will contact each other and set up a mutually agreeable time and date.
 (b) In the event an agreement on time and date cannot be reached, the GHSA Executive Director will set the time and date.
 (c) In situations where fewer than five (5) courts are available per team match, the order of play must be as follows: No. 1 singles, No. 1 doubles, No. 2 singles, No. 2 doubles, No. 3 singles.
 (d) The home team is responsible for reporting the winners and scores to the GHSA office by 9:00 a.m., the day after the match.
8. On May 9, 2015 the State Finals will be held for both boys and girls for all classifications at the Clayton County International Park Tennis Center.
 The order of competition is as follows:
 Saturday, May 9:
  (1)   8:45 a.m. Class A Girls and Boys (public and private schools) report to site
  (2) 10:15 a.m. Class AA & AAA Girls and Boys report to site
  (3) 11:45 a.m. Class AAAA & AAAAA Girls and Boys report to site
  (4)   1:00 p.m. Class AAAAAA Girls and Boys report to site
 
B. All team matches shall be the best three of five (3 singles/2 doubles) matches, using the 12-point tie-breaker.
1. A team winning three (3) of the five matches (3 singles/2 doubles) shall be the winner.
2. A team match is concluded as soon as three (3) points have been won.
 
C. Each team shall furnish five (5) cans of high-quality, heavy-duty tennis balls.
1. New balls will be used in the first team match.
2. After the team match, the losing team will keep the balls used in that match, and the winning team takes the unopened cans of balls to the next round of competition.
3. In the final match, the winner will be given the choice of the balls used in that match or the unopened balls.
 
D. For all rounds of the state playoffs prior to the finals, the host school shall provide a designated “site manager” to make rulings concerning sportsmanship, lateness, or other rules violations that might occur during the match.     
This person should be a certified USTA official when possible, hired and paid for by the host school. In instances where a USTA official cannot be secured, a school administrator must be the replacement. For the finals, the GHSA will secure the site manager.
 
SECTION 14
TRACK AND FIELD

(2014-15)

 
GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. Track and Field is a team championship event for boys and girls that is based on Region (classes 2A - 6A) and Area (Class A public/private) competition. In Class A, there will be separate championships for public and private schools. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
 
B. All GHSA Track meets will be run in accordance with the rules published in the National Federation Track and Field and Cross Country Rule Book with any exceptions and/or adoptions noted in this section. (NOTE: Knowledge of and compliance to all exceptions is the responsibility of the head coach.)
 
C. Track meet requirements:
1. There will be no interscholastic practices or exhibition meets in Track.
2. The maximum number of meets that may be scheduled is twelve (12), but no individual student may compete in more than ten (10) meets (excluding the Region/Area, Sectional and State Meets).
3. Track teams may compete in one (1) indoor meet, and this meet will not count as a part of the ten (10) meets allowed per athlete provided the meet is after the date for practice to begin and prior to the date to begin regular competition.
4. It is permissible for coaches to use “split squads” during the regular season. However, the use of split squads will count as two (2) of that school’s maximum allowed competitions.
5. In accordance with By-Law 2.66, only one night before a school day may be used with a meet starting at 6:00 p.m. or later.
 
D. Any meet involving eight (8) or more schools must be approved by the GHSA Executive Director in accordance with the process described in By-Law 2.64.
 
E. A contestant in Track and Field may enter a maximum of both relays, and any one (1) of the combinations listed below.  Competitors not on one or both relay teams are still restricted to one of the following combinations:
1. three (3) field events
2. two (2) field events and one (1) running event
3. one (1) field event and two (2) running events
4. relay teams for a school may be composed of any eligible student from that school, but after qualifying in the Region meet, there may be no change in the contestants of that team.
 
F. The following regulations apply to the Pole Vault event:
1. All GHSA schools competing in the pole vault event must meet the minimum NFHS regulations on the vaulting area, the plant box, the vaulting standards, the crossbar and the landing pads. Schools not able to meet these regulations are not allowed to practice or compete in the pole vault event at the non-complying site.
2. A listing of approved schools has been established for the pole vault. Annually, those schools making changes in their pole vault equipment and/or facilities MUST report the changes to the GHSA office.
3. In compliance with NFHS rules, coaches must verify that all vaulters and poles meet event requirements. A “Pole Vault Verification Form” (found on the GHSA web site) is to be submitted before each competition.
 
G. All competitors shall have legal uniforms. The uniform must consist of a track top and track bottom or a speedsuit purchased by the school, inventoried by the school and issued by the school. Uniform bottoms clearly designed as “underwear” will NOT meet the GHSA requirement. In relay races, each team member shall wear the same color and design of school uniform. Any visible shirt worn under the track jersey, and other visible apparel worn under the shorts, must be unadorned and of a single (same) color. Clothing items with multiple logos are not designed as outerwear and are NOT legal. Uniforms must be exactly the same per event. (EXAMPLE: team members throwing the discus must have the exact same uniform. Relay team members must have on the exact same uniform. But the discus and relay uniforms may be slightly different from each other.)      
NOTE: The ultimate responsibility for uniforms compliance lies with the coach. Coaches should inspect any/all garments competitors wear to make sure they are in compliance with GHSA and NFHS uniforms rules.
 
H. Athletes may not complete while wearing:
1. Jewelry.
2. Hair beads of any type.
3. Sunglasses.
 
I. Electronic devices, including but not limited to disc players, tape players, cell phones, pagers, walkie talkies, are permitted for use by coaches within designated coaching boxes or outside of restricted competition areas.
 
J. In the Region/Area and State meets, eight (8) places shall be scored, with point totals counting as follows:
 First Place = 10 points
 Second Place =   8 points
 Third place =   6 points
 Fourth Place =   5 points
 Fifth Place =   4 points
 Sixth Place =   3 points
 Seventh Place =   2 points
 Eighth Place =   1 point
 NOTE: When there is a tie, the points will be divided equally among the contestants who are tied.
 
REGION/AREA COMPETITION:
 
A. Deadlines for posting the Region/Area list of entries will be a Region/Area decision.
1. All entries must be made ELECTRONICALLY on the GHSA web site. A template will be posted there for use by all head track coaches.
2. Posting entries on sites other than the GHSA web site does NOT fulfill the GHSA requirement for electronic submission.
3. Coaches may alter the list of entries up until the “Scratch Meeting” that precedes the Region/Area Meet.
4. All Region Secretaries/Area Coordinators should communicate their deadline for entries before the “Scratch Meeting” that precedes the Region/Area Meet.
 
B. The time schedule for the Region/Area Meet shall be given to each competing school prior to the start of the Meet.
1. The Schedule for Boys Track (16 events) is in the following order:
 400m Relay 3200m Run
 1600m Run 1600m Relay
 400m Dash Shot Put (12 lb./5.443 kg.)
 100m Dash High Jump
 110m High Hurdles (39”) Long Jump
 800 m Run Pole Vault
 200m Dash Discus (3.53 lb./1.6 kg.)
 300m Intermediate Hurdles (36”) Triple Jump
2. The Schedule for Girls Track (16 events) is in the following order:
 400m Relay 300m Low Hurdles (30”)
 1600m Run 3200m Run
 400m Dash 1600m Relay
 100m Dash Shot Put (8.81 lb./4.0 kg.)
 100m Intermediate Hurdles (33”) Triple Jump
 800m Run High Jump
 Discus (2.20 lb./1 kg.) Long Jump
 200 m Dash Pole Vault
3. Each school may have two (2) entries in each event.
4. Relay teams should list four (4) runners and two (2) alternates.
 (a) No replacements may be made after the “Scratch Meeting” preceding competition.
 (b) Any four (4) of the six (6) listed may run in the event, but after qualifying trials in a Region/Area Meet have been run, there may be no changes in the contestants on a team.
 (c) Schools with two (2) qualifying teams in the same relay may not list competitors on one team as alternates on the other team, nor may the same alternates be listed for both teams.
5. In Shot Put, Discus, Long Jump, and Triple Jump, the giving of qualifying and final trials is optional.
 NOTE: The Region/Area Games Committee may institute a process in which each contestant has three (3) attempts and only the best attempt counts.
6. It is recommended that all Regions/Areas conduct the boys and girls competitions on the same dates in order to comply with the GHSA deadline for completion of Region/Area track competitions.
 
C. When there is a tie in any event involving more contestants than the Region/Area is entitled to enter in the Sectional or State Meet, the contest must continue or be reheld until the representatives to the Sectional or State Meet are determined, and no points be given for the continued or reheld contest. For possible replacement purposes, all field events must determine clear 5th and 6th place finishers.
 
D. The 4 x 800 meter relay may be run as a “demonstration event” at the Region/Area track meets. Participation is voluntary, but all event limitations for athletes will be unchanged.
 
SECTIONAL COMPETITION:
 
A. Basic Information
1. The top four (4) finishers in each event from each Region/Area meet will advance to a Sectional Meet.
2. Boys and Girls Sectionals in each classification will take place on the same date at the same site (see schedule of Sectionals).
3. For Running Events, there will be qualifying heats only - no running finals will be held.
 (a) There will be two heats in each event. The top two (2) finishers in each heat and the next four (4) fastest times from either heat will advance to the State Final.
 (b) For the 1,600 Meter and 3,200 Meter Runs, the top eight (8) finishers in each race (2A - 6A) will advance to the State Final. In Class A, the top four (4) finishers from each Area will advance directly to the State Final.
4. For Field Events (classes 2A - 6A), finals will be held in all events with the top eight (8) finishers advancing to the State Final. For replacement purposes, all field events must determine clear 9th and 10th place finishers. Class A will qualify nine (9) finishers to the State Final to compete for eight places.
 
B. Sectionals will be conducted one (1) week prior to the earliest State Final. Admission fee for all Sectional Meets shall be $5.
 
C. All replacements from the Region/Area meets for the Sectionals must be made ELECTRONICALLY using the form posted on the GHSA web site. The REGION SECRETARY or his designee may make confirmed changes and/or corrections. The deadline for all changes is 12:00 noon on Wednesday, April 29, 2015.
 
D. A listing of Sectional Sites may be found on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net).
 
STATE FINAL:
 
A. The State Final will be scheduled as announced prior to the event.
1. If weather conditions alter the schedule, night sessions may be held or the schedule may be condensed to a one-day meet (events may be run morning and/or evening).
2. Preliminaries may be eliminated and finals held in any of the events provided that notice is given prior to the beginning of the meet.
3. In each preliminary running event (semifinals) in classes 2A through 6A, there will be two (2) heats with the first two (2) finishers in each heat and the next four (4) fastest times qualifying for the finals. Class A will run in finals only on Saturday.
 
B. The top finishers as described from each Sectional Meet will qualify for the State Final in all classifications.
1. When a qualifier can not compete in the State Final, the next competitor in the order of finish will be selected as a replacement.
2. All replacements for the State Final must be made ELECTRONICALLY using the form posted on the GHSA web site. Only the SECTIONAL TRACK MEET DIRECTOR may make changes/corrections to the list of State Final Qualifiers. The deadline for all changes is 12:00 noon two (2) days prior to the beginning of the State Final.
 Girls:  Tuesday, May 5, 2015  Boys:  Tuesday, May 12, 2015
3. All entries for the State Final will be posted on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net) for verification. Schools will not receive paper copies of their qualified athletes. It is the responsibility of EACH COACH to review the      
school’s entries on the web site and immediately notify the Sectional Meet Director if corrections need to be made.
4. A contestant disqualified in a Region/Area or Sectional Meet may not participate in the State Final in the event in which he was disqualified.
5. Relay teams should list four (4) runners and two (2) alternates.
 (a) No replacements may be made of the runners and alternates qualifying at the Region/Area Meet.
 (b) Any four (4) of the six (6) listed may run in the event.
 (c) Schools with two qualifying teams in the same relay may not list competitors on one team as alternates on the other team, nor may the same alternates be listed for both teams.
 
C. Each contestant is requested to bring his/her own shot and discus.
1. Any contestant may use any shot or discus after it has been checked for weight and legality at the field.
2. Rings for the shot and discus are concrete; therefore, rubber soled shoes must be worn.
3. The NFHS Track and Field Rule Book will be strictly enforced in regard to the time between jumps and throws.
 
D. At the State Finals (boys and girls), 34.92-degree throwing sectors will be used (Discus: Rule 6-4-5; Shot Put: Rule 6-5). Schools, Region hosts, Area hosts and Sectionals hosts must have the 34.92-degree sectors in place for the Region/Area and Sectionals meets.
 
E. The tracks and runways that are used for both State Finals are all-weather tracks.
1. Spikes on track shoes must not exceed the specified length(s) at each State Meet:  
  Girls at Albany: 1/8”   Boys at Jefferson:   1/4”
 NOTE: Shoes may be inspected before contestants are allowed on the track.
2. Spikes that have been cut off by individuals must be filed to a sharp point. Blunt spikes will not be allowed.
3. Replacement spikes will be sold at each state meet site.
4. Only the starting blocks furnished at the track may be used in the State Meets.
 
F. Admission price for each of the State Meets is $7.00 per day.
 
WHEELCHAIR TRACK AND FIELD:
 
1. All high school students with a permanent, physical disability may be eligible to participate on their school’s track and field team. These students will have the opportunity to compete in the 200 and 800 meter wheelchair races and the shot put. There will be two (2) divisions of competition in the shot put based upon the disability.
2. Students who participate must meet all GHSA eligibility requirements.
3. All athletes qualified for the Wheelchair competition must compete in either a standard wheelchair, a throwing chair or a specially designed racing chair.
4. Students will be members of the school's track and field team and will compete at all the school’s meets (regardless of the number of wheelchair competitors).  The athletes must compete in their school’s team uniform. The top eight (8) qualifiers over the entire track season in each event will advance to compete at the State Track Meet.
5. Wheelchair racers must use a racing wheelchair, gloves and a bicycle helmet that meets ANSI standards.
6.  In the shot put, boys Class 1 will use an 8.81lb./4.0 kg. shot while boys Class 2 will use a 6 lb. shot. Girls in Classes 1 and 2 will use a 6 lb. shot.
7. Coaches must complete a required training course conducted by AAASP.
8. All times and distances are to be reported to resultsga@aaasp.org
9. For more information, contact AAASP at 404-294-0070 or see the AAASP web site www.adaptedsports.org.
 
GIRLS STATE MEET - ALL CLASSES
Albany, Georgia  -  May 7, 8, 9, 2015
 
INFORMATION:
1. Notice to all Track coaches:
(a) Contestants and coaches will enter and exit through the Pass Gate located at the West end of the stadium.
(b) Coaches should pick up their information packets at the Information Booth located near the Pass Gate. NOTE: Coaches must show their GHSA Coaches Pass in order to receive their information packet.
(c) An area will be designated for bus parking.
(d) Dressing areas are available at the site.
(e) If needed, a security room will be made available to store valuables in a team bag with the school's name visible.
(f) Schools must comply with all GHSA/NFHS rules regarding the uniforms of all competitors.
(g) All teams are requested to bring a school banner or poster to display during the Opening Ceremonies in the “Parade of Athletes.”  All contestants are invited and encouraged to participate in the parade.
 
2. For all events for all three days, the schedule and order of events as posted on the GHSA web site will be used.
(a) In any running event in which qualifying heats are scheduled and there are eight or fewer entries, qualifying will be eliminated and all entries will qualify for the finals.
(b) If any change in the schedule becomes necessary due to weather conditions, GHSA regulations will be followed.
(c) Times posted for events are approximate and relative to factors influencing the conduct of the meet. Coaches must plan accordingly in order to avoid conflicts.
(d) The order of field events in class A will be private first, public second except in the High Jump where both pits will be used. The order of running events in class A will be private first, public second.
 
3. Medals will be awarded for first and second places in each event, and trophies will be awarded to the schools that finish first and second in each classification.
 
4. EMS personnel will be available at the stadium to transport injured athletes if necessary.
 
BOYS STATE MEET - ALL CLASSES
Jefferson, Georgia  -  May 14, 15, 16, 2015
 
INFORMATION:
 
1. Coaches should pick up their information packets and programs at the Information Desk which is located at the back of the Press Box after 9:00 a.m. on May 14, 2015.
 
2. For all events for all three days, the schedule and order of events as posted on the GHSA web site will be used. Times posted for events are approximate and relative to factors influencing the conduct of the meet. Coaches must plan accordingly in order to avoid conflicts.
 
3. Field events for all classifications will be completed at the first session. Contestants should allow ample time to have their shots and discus weighed at the field.
 
4. The order of field events and running events in Class A will be private first, public second.
 
SECTION 15
VOLLEYBALL

(2014-15)

REGULAR SEASON:
 
A. Volleyball is organized on an Area basis with a state championship in all six classifications. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication.
 
B. The National Federation Volleyball rules committee has given each state its option about the number of games that determine a match.
1. The GHSA will limit all matches to best-of-three except for championship matches in the Area Tournament  and  in all post-season play.
2. EXCEPTION:  Non-area dual matches may use the best-of-five format on nights before a school day.
3. In non-area competitions that occur in a tournament or play-day format, the third set shall be played to fifteen  (15) points.
 
C. Notification of entry in Volleyball must be filed in writing with the GHSA State Office no later than February 1, for the next school year.  Schools will be assigned by the GHSA Executive Director to a geographic area for competition, and then will be notified of that assignment.
 
D. Playing dates:
1. Schools have a maximum of 18 playing dates regardless of whether or not it is a tournament format or head-to-head competition (each day of a tournament equals one playing date). Area and State playoffs are not counted as part of the allotted playing dates.
2. An invitational tournament is defined as three (3) or more schools competing in a single or double elimination format that leads to a champion being declared.  The use of pool play is acceptable.
3. The maximum number of days for an invitational tournament is two (2) days.
4. No school shall enter any tournament unless it has been approved by the GHSA Executive Director.
5. Regular season playing dates on days/nights preceding a school day shall be limited to no more than three matches per court per night.
 (a) dual matches - must start no later than 7:00 p.m.
 (b) multiple matches - must start no later than 6:00 p.m.
6. In accordance with By-Law 2.66, only one night before a school day per week may be used with competitions beginning at 6:00 p.m. or later.
 
E. MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION:
1. Artificial noisemakers may not be used (regular season or post-season) while the ball is in play.
2. Display of signs in the stands is not allowed during regular season or post season competition.
3. Competitors must stay in uniform while in the competitive area.
4. All varsity Volleyball matches shall be officiated by at least one (1) officially-dressed volleyball official who is registered under the GHSA plan for the registration of officials
5. Each school will have a contract with an officials association for regular season matches, play days and invitational tournaments.
 (a) For regular-season matches, each team will be billed by the official’s association for one-half of the officiating fees for the games in which they played. The host school will pay the officials’ travel fee.
 (b) For invitational tournaments and play days, the host team will be billed for the officiating fees (including travel).
6. In accordance with National Federation rules, teams may use multi-colored balls in the regular season and post-season competitions.
 
AREA AND STATE PLAYOFFS:
 
A. Each Area may determine its procedure for selecting teams for the playoffs.  The Area may use regular season records and not have an Area Tournament. The Area may choose to have either a single-elimination or a double-elimination tournament with schools seeded on the basis of their Area records - or may allow schools to play a non-Area schedule and then be seeded into the Area Tournament, if travel is an issue. That choice must be submitted to the GHSA Volleyball Coordinators before the first competition date of the regular season.
1. The number of teams advancing from each Area to the State Playoffs shall be set by the Executive Director.
2. All finances (including officials’ game fees and travel) will be the responsibility of the Area.
3. Ticket prices are to be set at $5.00 for all persons.
4. The GHSA will receive 5% of the gross gate receipts.
5. Results of each Area Tournament must be sent to the GHSA office AND to the GHSA Volleyball Coordinators (classes 4A through 6A: Patty Craven pattycraven@bellsouth.net; class A through 3A: Jona Braden jonab@westminster.net) within 24 hours of the completion of the event.
 
B. The State Volleyball playoffs will consist of four rounds (three rounds in Class AA) of dual matches held at the site of the higher seeded team and a championship round held at central sites.
1. All playoff matches will be a best-of-five, single-elimination format.
2. The seeding for the first two rounds (Classes A and 3A through 6A) will be determined by the ranking out of area competition. The seeding in the third round will be determined by the GHSA Volleyball Seeding Committee.
3. In Class AA, the top two (2) teams from each Area will qualify automatically for the State Playoffs. The remaining teams will be ranked via a point system and the top four (4) of those teams will receive at-large bids to the State Playoffs. Bracket position will be determined by a blind draw (with Area winners playing at-large teams in the first round) and will be posted on the GHSA web site.
4. Finances for all classes through the Semifinal Round will be handled as follows:
 (a) Ticket prices will be $5.00 per day.
 (b) The GHSA will receive 12% of the gross gate receipts.
 (c) Officials’ fees (including travel) will be taken from the gross gate receipts and paid by the host school.
 (d) The visiting team will be paid mileage at the GHSA-approved rate.
 (e) Any residual funds will be split between the two teams.
 (f) The host school will be entitled to all concession funds.
5. Finances for the Championship matches shall be handled as follows:
 (a) Ticket prices will be $7.00 per day.
 (b) The host school will retain 20% of the gross gate receipts for expenses.
 (c) The remainder of the gate receipts will be sent to the GHSA office.
  1. GHSA will retain 12% of the gross receipts.
  2. GHSA will pay the officials.
  3. Any funds remaining will be disbursed to the competing teams.
6. The number of free admissions for “traveling parties” of participating teams at playoff contests shall be 20 players, managers, trainers and statisticians.  Coaches will be admitted on their coaching passes.
7. Line Judges will be supplied by the various officials’ associations for all post-season matches.
 
SECTION 16
WRESTLING

(2014-15)

 
GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. Wrestling will be a state open meet with separate competitions for classes A through 6A. Traditional wrestling teams will compete in Area Tournaments (Classes A through 2A will be divided into four (4) Areas each, while classes 3A through 6A will be divided into eight (8) Areas each), a State Sectional Tournament and the State Finals Tournament. There will also be separate competitions in Team Dual Wrestling. Information on this competition is found later in this section.
 
B. The National Federation Wrestling Rules shall be the official rules for Georgia schools with the exception of any special regulations found in this section.
 
C.  Notification of entry in Wrestling must be filed with the GHSA office no later than April 1 for the next school year.  Schools will then be assigned to a geographic area by the GHSA Executive Director, and then will be notified of that assignment.
 
D.  Free Style and Greco Roman wrestling are considered to be the same sport as Folk Style (high school) wrestling and are subject to GHSA rules concerning illegal practices.  
 
E. A school may enter its wrestling team in competition for twenty (20) playing dates.  Area Duals, Area Traditional, State Duals and State Traditional Tournaments are not included in the twenty (20) playing dates. NOTE: After December 31, no new wrestling competitions may be scheduled unless approved by the GHSA Executive Director.
1. The maximum number of days for an invitational tournament is two (2) dates.
2. On a day/night preceding a school day, a student may not wrestle more than three (3) matches. On all other occasions, a student may not wrestle more than five (5) matches per day. Forfeits do not count toward the daily match limit.
3. Contestants must have 45 minutes rest between matches.
4. Only one day/night preceding a school day per week may be used for varsity wrestling matches, and only one day/night preceding a school day per week may be used for sub-varsity matches.
5. A student may wrestle on only one day/night preceding a school day per week.
6. The starting time for a single dual wrestling match on nights preceding a school day may be no later than 7:00 p.m.  When a JV match is included, that match should start at 6:00 p.m. with the varsity match to follow.
7. A wrestler may wrestle in both a varsity and a sub-varsity match on the same day as long as that wrestler does not exceed the maximum number of matches allowed for that day.
8. It is permissible for coaches to use “split squads” during the regular season. However, the use of split squads will count as two (2) of that school’s maximum allowed competitions.
 
F. Beginning and ending dates for practice and competition can be found at the front of this publication..
1. A school shall not allow its team to engage in any interscholastic exhibition, practice, or scrimmage matches.
2. A practice shall involve only eligible students in the member school and their approved coaches.  Participation by outside individuals constitutes an illegal practice.
3. Wrestling matches in practice must be conducted in adherence with National Federation and GHSA rules, and will involve only eligible team members.
4. Schools having contestants in the State Tournament may provide a teammate of comparable size to practice for the State Tournament.
5. There will be no Spring practice for Wrestling.
 
G. Weight classifications shall be as follows:
106 lbs. 132 lbs. 160 lbs. 195 lbs.
113 lbs. 138 lbs. 170 lbs. 220 lbs.
120 lbs. 145 lbs. 182 lbs. 285 lbs.
126 lbs. 152 lbs.
1. When there are consecutive days of team competition, there shall be a one (1) pound additional allowance granted each day for all wrestlers (up to a maximum of two (2) pounds for any weigh-in). In order to be granted this one (1) pound additional allowance, a minimum of 48 hours advance notice is required for the opponent(s). NOTE: There shall be no consecutive day weight allowance granted for teams/athletes which compete the day before any post-season championship series tournament.
2. The GHSA does not approve any practice that endangers the health and safety of wrestlers.  Crash dieting, the use of diuretics and other drugs for rapid weight reduction, the use of a sweat box, any type of vinyl or plastic sweat suit or bag, hot showers, whirlpool, or any other type of artificial heat device for rapid weight reduction is prohibited.
3. For school day meets only, teams will weigh-in at their respective schools prior to the start of the school day. An administrator must supervise the weigh-in to be certain all GHSA and National Federation rules are met. Weigh-ins will take place within one hour of the time school begins.
 (a) On a day when the host school is not in session, but other participants are, weigh-ins for the competition may be held at the beginning of the school day for all schools involved.
 (b) For days when all schools competing in an event are not in session, weigh-ins must take place at the site of the competition and shall be conducted by wrestling officials.
4. In tournament competitions (including regular season, invitationals and the State Championship series), wrestlers will have an option of having their second weigh-in conducted at the conclusion of the first day of competition OR one hour before competitions begin on the second day. NOTE: Any wrestler indicating that he is prepared to weigh-in the first day and does not “make the proper weight” will not be allowed to weigh-in on the second day. The exact times for weigh-ins will be determined at the tournament site.
5. All contestants may engage in legal weight loss activities on site until weigh-ins begin. Once weigh-ins begin, activities that promote weight loss/dehydration or weight gain are prohibited. Contestants shall not leave the designated weigh-in area unless permission is granted by the school administrator or meet director.
6. Only two (2) certified coaches (affiliated with the school of the athlete on the mat) will be allowed at mat side during regular season tournaments and at the Area, Sectional and State Finals tournaments.
 
H. Coaching requirements:
1. All coaches are required to complete the GHSA/NFHS Wrestling Rules Clinic presented online via the GHSA web site.
2. A minimum of one (1) coach at each school must complete the on-line seminar of the policies and procedures for the “Wrestling Weight Management Program.”
3. Failure to abide by the above requirements will result in fines assessed against the school.
4. Prior to all competitions, coaches must present a properly-dated weigh-in roster (created no more than three (3) days prior to the event) to the head official, demonstrating that the Weight Management Programs is being followed.
 
I. All varsity wrestling matches shall be held with officially-dressed wrestling officials who are registered under the GHSA plan for the registration of officials, or with the State Association of another state.
(a) Before each meet, the referee shall perform skin checks and sign a verification form.
(b) The referee also shall check for items outlined as pre-meet duties for officials in the NFHS Wrestling Rules
 Book except for mat-side weight-ins.
 
J. Appropriate heath-care professionals shall be available at all wrestling tournaments.
 
K. Communicable Skin Disorders:
1. The GHSA strongly recommends that wrestling mats be left unrolled during the competitive season, and be disinfected a minimum of three (3) times per week with a medically-approved cleansing solution.
2. In the event an athlete develops a skin disorder or skin lesion that is considered contagious, the school must complete and provide the “Physician's Release for Wrestler to Participate” form. No other form of documentation will be accepted at the site of the competition. The release form is to be presented by the coach at the weigh-in or prior to competition. NOTE: The form and information can be found on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net).
L. When a coach is charged with a flagrant misconduct penalty, that individual must go to a location outside the “sight and sound” of the competitive area, and can have no interactions with wrestlers or any other team personnel (removal from premises).
 
WEIGHT MANAGEMENT PROGRAM:
 
A. All GHSA wrestling schools will participate in the mandatory and binding “Weight Management Program.”
 
B. Schools must enter weigh-in results in the computerized weight management program (OPC) within 48 hours of each weigh-in or before the next scheduled contest.  An athlete’s weight descent plan ends on January 31, 2015; it is not necessary to enter weights into the OPC after the area tournament.
 
C. The Wrestling Weight Management Coaches Handbook, which contains details of program guidelines and forms, will be posted on the GHSA web site.
 
D. Schools must have all scales used for wrestling weigh-ins certified annually by the Georgia Department of Agriculture (Fuels and Measures; 404-656-3605).
 
TEAM  DUAL WRESTLING
GENERAL INFORMATION
 
A. Team Dual Wrestling will be a state open meet with separate competitions in all six classifications. NOTE: Teams will be seeded after Area Tournaments.
 
B. National Federation and GHSA rules governing Traditional wrestling are in effect for Team Dual Wrestling.
 
C. GHSA weight certification policies will apply to Team Dual Wrestling.
 
D. Athletes may not wrestle at a weight class lower than allowed by the “Weight Loss Plan” of the GHSA Weight Management Program for that date.
 
E. All wrestlers must weigh-in each day of a multiple-day event, and they must weigh-in at the same weight class each day of the event.
1. A wrestler is only eligible for two weight classes during a multiple-day team advancement tournament.
2. The weight classes for which a wrestler is eligible to compete are determined on the first day’s weight-in, and  cannot change during the remainder of the event.  
 
F. Teams may weigh-in all eligible and weight class-certified wrestlers.  
 
AREA TOURNAMENTS:
 
A. The date(s) for the Area Dual Tournaments shall be decided by each Area. All tournaments must be completed by January 10, 2015.
 
B. Officials are to be secured and paid by the Area. In addition to on-mat and travel fees, the officials conducting weigh-ins shall be paid $30 per official per weigh-in session.
 
C. In all classes (A through 6A), each Area shall determine the third and fourth place teams.
 
D. The GHSA will receive 5% of the gross gate receipts.
 
E. Schools may opt out of participation in the Area Dual Tournament by providing written notice to the GHSA and the Area Duals host school. This written notice must be received no later than 30 days before the date of the Area Dual Tournament.
 
F. Schools may schedule individual matches or tournaments on the date of the Area Duals as long as the match/tournament is placed on their competition schedule by December 31st of that season.
 
G. Schools which do not qualify for the State Dual Tournament may schedule individual matches and/or tournaments on the dates of the State Duals, but must receive written permission from the GHSA to do so.
 
STATE TOURNAMENTS:
 
A. Two teams from each Area (A through 6A) will advance to the double-elimination Team Dual State Championships. The Team Dual State Championships for all classes will be held January 15-17, 2015 at the Macon Centreplex.
 
B. The teams advancing to the state tournament must be designated to the GHSA office no later than 9:00 a.m., on Monday, January 12, 2015.
 
C. The GHSA will assign and pay all officials.
 
D. Trophies and medals will be provided by the GHSA and will be presented to the State Champion and the Runner-up in each classification.
 
E. Each school participating in the State Tournament will be allowed free admission for up to twenty-eight (28) team members, plus a maximum of four (4) mat maids/managers.
 
F. Admission is $7 on Thursday,  $10 per day for Friday and Saturday. A total tournament ticket will be sold for $24.
 
G. In the event the Area or the State Team Dual Tournament ends in a tie, the winner shall be determined using the National Federation tie-breaking system published in the Wrestling Rules Book (rule 9-2-2).
 
H. The second weigh-in of the State Tournament will be conducted on Friday at the conclusion of each’s school’s competition for that day. Teams may opt to weigh-in on Saturday morning rather than out on Friday night. All weigh-in times will be determined by the tournament administration.
 
TRADITIONAL WRESTLING
 
AREA TOURNAMENTS:
 
A. Area tournaments in classes A through 6A may be held on either Saturday, January 31, 2015, or Friday and Saturday, January 30-31, 2015. Those hosting Area Tournaments are encouraged to hold a one-day tournament whenever possible.
 
B. Areas will be divided with consideration to geographic proximity and to the number of schools involved.  The top four (4) wrestlers in each weight class from each Area Tournament (classes A through 6A) will advance to the State Sectional Tournament.
 
C. A listing of all traditional Area Tournament sites can be found on the GHSA web site.
 
D. Officials are to be secured and paid by the Area. In addition to on-mat and travel fees, the officials conducting weigh-ins shall be paid $30 per official per weigh-in session.
 
E. All finances will be handled by the Area, including all expenses, payment of officials and distribution of receipts.
 
F. Admission is $7.00 per day, or a total tournament ticket for two-day events may be sold for $12.00. The GHSA will receive 5% of the gross gate receipts.
 
G. Scoring for wrestlers failing to report, failing skin checks, not weighing in or not making weight will follow NFHS guildelines for forfeitures.
 
STATE SECTIONAL TOURNAMENTS:
 
A. All State Sectional Tournaments (classes A through 6A) will be held on Friday and/or Saturday, February 6-7, 2015.
 
B. Schools in all classifications will be assigned to Sectional sites. A listing of all Sectional sites can be found on the GHSA web site.
 
C. In Classes 3A through 6A, the top eight (8) wrestlers in each weight class from each Sectional Tournament will advance to the State Finals Tournament. In Classes A through 2A, the top four (4) wrestlers in each weight class from each Sectional Tournament will advance to the State Finals Tournament. NOTE: The Sectional Tournaments are qualifying tournaments only, therefore no team scoring will be used. However, penalties which normally result in team point assessments will have the team point(s) deducted at the start of the State Finals Tournament.
 
D. Officials in all classes will be assigned and paid by the GHSA.
 
E. Sectional host sites (Classes 3A through 6A)  will be budgeted $800 to offset any other expenses. In Classes A and 2A, host sites will be budgeted $500 to offset any other expenses.
 
F. All replacements for wrestlers who qualified for the Sectional Tournaments must be made by the Area Director and must be reported to the GHSA office no later than 12:00 noon on Wednesday, February 4, 2015.
1. Failure to meet this deadline will result in a vacancy in the bracket.
2. Schools failing to report a wrestler who will not advance are subject to penalties.
3. Alternates are allowed (but not required) to weigh-in and be placed on the bracket at the Sectional Tournaments
 if a wrestler representing the same Area does not attempt to weigh-in.
 
G. Admission fees for Sectional Tournaments are $7.00 per day or $12.00 for a total tournament ticket.
 
STATE FINALS TOURNAMENT:
 
A. The Traditional State Finals Tournament will be held on Thursday, Friday and Saturday, February 12-14, 2015. Championships in all classifications will be held at a centralized site to be determined.
 
B. Reports of wrestlers advancing to the State Finals Tournament must be transmitted electronically to the State Tournament Director no later than 10:00 p.m., on Saturday, February 7, 2015. Specific reporting instructions will be forwarded to each Sectional Tournament Director.
 
C. All replacements for wrestlers who qualified for the State Finals Tournament must be made by the Sectional Director, and must be reported to the GHSA office no later than 12:00 noon on Wednesday, February 11, 2015. Schools failing to report a wrestler who will not advance are subject to penalties.
 
D. Wrestlers must wrestle in the Area and State Tournaments at the weight certified in accordance with all provisions of the GHSA Wrestling Weight Management Program.
1. Wrestlers shall weigh-in at a specified time on the first day of competition for their classification. Wrestlers will have the option for their second weigh-in to be in the evening following competition or prior to competition the next morning.
2. All weigh-in times will be determined by tournament administration.
 
E. Admission prices for State Finals Tournament will be $7.00 on Thursday, and $10 per day on Friday and Saturday. A total tournament ticket will be sold for $24.00.
 
F. Each school participating in the State Finals Tournament will be allowed free admission for all wrestlers who qualify for the tournament and a maximum of two (2) managers, mat maids and/or student trainers. Alternates will not be admitted without charge unless they have been substituted into the tournament in accordance with tournament procedures.
 
G. Schools having athletes qualified for the State Finals Tournament must submit (electronically from the GHSA web site) the “Roster of Admissions Form” no later than 12:00 noon on Wednesday, February 11, 2015. Persons not listed on this form will not be admitted without charge.
 
H. The State Finals Tournament will be scored to six (6) places.  
 
I. Full wrestlebacks (double elimination) will be allowed in all classifications. Cross-bracketing shall be used for wrestlebacks.
 
J. In the event the Traditional State Tournament ends in a tie, the teams will be declared co-champions.
 
LITERARY

(2014-15)

 
GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. There are two (2) events in the Fine Arts that produce State Champions in each classification.  Those events are One Act Play and Literary.
1. The Literary events include:
 (a) Dramatic Interpretation  -  Boys and Girls
 (b) Essay  -  Boys and Girls
 (c) Extemporaneous Speaking  -  Boys and Girls
 (d) Boys Quartet
 (e) Solo  -  Boys and Girls
 (f) Girls Trio
2. Eligibility reports are required for all Literary contestants.
 (a) Contestants must be academically eligible as specified in By-Law 1.50, and can not be a migrant student as defined in By-Law 1.60.
 (b) Eligibility reports must be received in the GHSA Office at least twenty (20) days prior to the first contest.
 
B. The rules and regulations of the GHSA as developed and enforced by state and region personnel and as published in the GHSA Constitution and By-Laws shall govern the operation of all Literary meets.  
NOTE:   It is important that all rules be followed precisely in all competitions leading up to the state competition in order to avoid “surprise” disqualifications.
 
C. In Literary, a student may represent their school in not more than two (2) individual events and a group event. A school may have only one entry per contest. NOTE: There may be a conflict in schedule when a student is in two events.
 
D. Photography, recording, or video taping will not be allowed at any GHSA Literary event or One Act Play.
 
E. Each school wishing to enter One Act Play and Literary must notify the Region Secretary in writing by the deadline dates.
1. The One Act Play “Notification of Entry” Form must be filed by October 1.
2. The Literary “Contestants List” Form must be filed by February 1.
 NOTE:  The above forms can be found on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net).
3. The Region Literary Meets may be held on any date after February 1 provided they are completed by March 7, 2015.
4. The State Literary Meet will be held on Saturday, March 14, 2015. See schedules at the end of the Literary Section.
 
REGION INFORMATION:
 
A. The first-place winner from every region (Classes 2A through 6A) in each Literary event qualifies for the State Meet. Class A is divided into four (4) Areas for Public schools, with the first-place winners in each event advancing to state, and two (2) Areas for Private schools, with the top two winners in each event advancing to state.
1. When the first-place winner in a region/area is not able to compete in the State Meet, the next person or group in the order of finish may replace the original winner.
 (a) The school whose winner will not compete must notify the Region Secretary so the replacement can be notified.
 (b) The Region Secretary must notify the GHSA Office about any changes in contestants.
 (c) The deadline to make any changes is the Wednesday (noon) prior to the State Meet.
2. In a Region/Area Meet where there is a tie in any event involving more contestants than the region is entitled to enter in the State Meet, the contest among the tied competitors must be continued or re-held until one representative can be determined.
 (a) In this situation, the points shall be divided equally among the persons or groups who were tied in the original competition.
 (b) The extended competition shall carry no points.
 (c) Ties in the State Meet shall stand, and the points shall be divided equally among those who are tied.
 
B. The GHSA Office will furnish each Region Secretary with a copy of score sheets that will be used in region competitions.
1. The same score sheet used in region/area competition will be used at the State Meet.
2. The GHSA score sheet includes:
 (a) space for the timekeeper to note the amount of time allotted for the event and the amount of time consumed by the contestant.
 (b) space for the rank of the contestant to be clearly noted
 (c) a place in which to write the name of the selection(s) performed
 (d) the amount of possible points available
 (e) space to note if the contestant was disqualified and to state the reason for the disqualification
3. Individual copies of the score sheet may be obtained from the GHSA Office or the GHSA web site.
 
C. Miscellaneous Regulations:
1. During competitions, contestants will be identified by “order of appearance” numbers.
2. A director/coach is expressly prohibited from “conducting” during a musical contest at the region and state competitions.
3. Digitally created music downloaded from the Internet may be used so long as all copyright laws have been met. It is the school’s responsibility to make sure all copyright laws have been met.
4. Each school having one or more students participating must have a school representative at the Region and State Meets.
5. When there is more than one judge, judges will rank the contestants based on the point totals of each contestant.
 (a) Winners will be chosen by adding up the rankings of each judge.
 (b) There can be no tied rankings or point totals on any judge's score sheet.
 (c) In the event of a tie between contestants when the rankings are tallied, point totals will be used to break the tie.
 (d) All judges decisions are final.  Mistakes due to mathematical errors or decisions made contrary to GHSA rules that are discovered before or after the decision of the judges shall be corrected.
 (e) Judges will be seated in different parts of the competition room, and will render their decisions without conferring.  NOTE:  When necessary, judges may sit together to view a single piece of music, but they may not confer with one another.
6. The presiding official at each event shall not (by word, gesture, or any other expression) indicate approval or disapproval of the performance of the contestant.
7. For timed events:
 (a) a timekeeper who has a stopwatch must be present.
 (b) the timekeeper shall not be a judge.
 (c) the timekeeper shall time all contestants and note the amount of time they consumed on all score sheets. If a contestant goes beyond the time allotted, he/she shall be penalized two (2) points for each fifteen (15) seconds or portions thereof that the presentation was too long.
 (d) Flashcards for time should be used in Extemporaneous Speaking and Dramatic Interpretation.
 
D. Point totals are the same for determining the Region/Area Champion and State Champion in Literary as follows:
First Place - 7 points;    Second Place - 5 points;   Third Place - 3 points;   Fourth Place - 1 point
NOTE:  One-Act Play is a separate Championship event.
 
STATE INFORMATION:
 
A. The State Literary Coordinator is Brian Barnett (e-mail brian.barnett@hcbe.net).
 
B. The GHSA will provide:
1. A competent person at each State Literary Meet to discuss the rules with the judges prior to the contest.
2. Competent judges to officiate the various competitions and will provide the judges with written copies of the rules for the various competitions.
3. Two judges will be used for all musical events and all speaking events.
4. All score sheets can be found on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net).
 
C. Completed score sheets at the State Meet are submitted by the judges to the chairperson of each contest.
1. The chairperson will place the score sheets in a properly marked envelope, seal it, and turn it in to the GHSA representative.
2. The envelope will be opened by the GHSA representatives who will tabulate the results and announce the winners.
3. In the event of error by the judges (i.e., mathematical errors, having tie scores, etc.) the score sheets will be returned to the judges for correction.
4. All judges decisions are final.  Protests are not allowed.
 
ONE ACT PLAY

(2014-15)

 
GENERAL INFORMATION:
 
A. One Act Play is a Region event in classifications 2A through 6A, and an Area event in Class A.
1. Each school wishing to enter One Act Play must notify the Region Secretary/Area Coordinator no later than October 1.
2. Region/Area winners must be determined by October 25, 2014, and the GHSA State Office must be notified by October 27, 2014.
 
B. The GHSA State One Act Play Coordinator and Director of Adjudication is Dean Slusser (e-mail dslusser@camden.k12.ga.us).
 
C. Specific Contest Rules:
1. Schools may choose to enter an excerpt or abridgement of a play as their One Act Play selection. Schools may not compete with a play or musical that was produced or work-shopped in the previous school year or previous two summers. Schools found in violation of this rule will be disqualified from competition.
2. Schools choosing to enter musical productions shall not use a reproduction of the original soundtrack as part of the presentation.
3. Each school assumes full responsibility for royalties and any other limitations on the play that is selected.
4. Each school is responsible for its own props, costumes, and make-up.
5. Each school is given 55 minutes to set-up, perform, and take-down its presentation.  The official time will be kept by an assigned official time keeper.
6. The timekeeper will record times and provide them to the lead judge at the end of the competition, after all the judges have completed scoring the plays.  Any school that exceeds its time allotment will be penalized two (2) points for each fifteen (15) second period or portion thereof per judge.
7. Only set pieces (free standing) may be used.
 (a) Schools are not to use EXCESSIVELY  LARGE  or COMPLICATED set pieces that take a long time to unload and assemble, etc.  This is an acting competition - not a set competition. Keep sets simple.
 (b) The time used to set-up and take-down set pieces is counted in the time of the presentation.  Any debris and confetti must be swept up.
 (c) Once the preceding play clears the stage, the next play has 15 minutes for set-up. If they are not set up at the end of that 15-minute interval, timing of their play begins and counts towards their 55-minute limit.
 (d) No part of any setting may be attached to any part of the stage, curtains, draperies, or other existing equipment of the host school.
 (e) All set pieces must be placed behind the “go” lines in the Strike Area on stage. These lines shall be placed at the wing line on stage right and stage left as well as two optional lines upstage (at mid-stage traveler and back traveler). When time is started, ALL set pieces must be moved PAST these lines onto the        
playing space. No portion of the Strike Area holding set prior to the production may be used as performance space. Before time is stopped, all pieces must be moved off the playing space behind the “go” lines. Sets should be designed to easily move onto and off the stage.
8. No flame of any type can be used, including candles. Real weapons of any kind, such as a sword or knife, etc., cannot be used.  Use of simulated weapons cannot be in violation of any local board of education policy of the participating school or the host site. Violation of this rule will result in disqualification (zero tolerance rule). Contact the host school for any clarification of their rules.
9. Plays are to be announced by the order of appearance number or the title of the play rather than by school name.
    10. Only eligible students are allowed on stage during play performance.  Piano placement must be off stage if an adult is playing.  Adults may assist in loading and unloading of sets.
    11. Principals must review the school's play and sign the statement on the “One Act Play Information Sheet” stating that the presentation is in good taste for high school students, and is acceptable for the morals of that community.
    12. The use of “body mikes” is allowed.
    13. Score sheets can be found on the GHSA web site (www.ghsa.net).
 
D. No photography or video taping is allowed of any One Act Play competition.
 
E. A mandatory program for judges’ training for One Act Play competitions will be implemented as follows:
1. 2014: At least two judges in each post-season competition must have completed the training program.
2. 2015: All judges in each post-season competition must have completed the training program.
 
REGION/AREA AND STATE COMPETITION:
 
A. The Region Secretary or Area Coordinator must file the winner of the Region competition with the GHSA Office according to the deadlines stated in the “Region Secretary Notebook.”
 
B. Dates and Sites for the State One Act plays:
 November 1, 2014:
 Class A - Warner Robins High School, Warner Robins
 Class AA - Northside High School, Warner Robins
 Class AAAA - Houston County High School, Warner Robins
 
 November 8, 2014:
 Class AAA - Baldwin High School, Milledgeville
 Class AAAAA - Perry High School, Perry
 Class AAAAAA - Veterans High School, Kathleen
 
C. The facilities that will be used for One-Act Play competitions will not be available for practice by any school in the State competition. At both Region/Area and State levels, a 10-minute “walk-through” will be allowed for play directors only. The directors of the plays scheduled for the first half of the day will all “walk through” during the same 10 minutes before the first play begins. The directors of the plays scheduled for the second half of the day will all have their 10-minute “walk-through” at the same time during the lunch break (or prior to the second half if there is no lunch break).
 
D. Schools will be responsible for making their own arrangements for housing and meals.
 
E. The schedule for 2A through 6A shall be: The schedule for Class A shall be:
 10:00  -  10:55 am - Region 3  10:00  - 10:55 am - Area 3 (Private Schools)
 11:00  -  11:55 am - Region 4  11:00  - 11:55 am - Area 4 (Private Schools)
 12:00  -  12:55 pm - Region 5  12:00  - 12:55 pm - Area 1 (Private Schools)
   1:00  -    1:55 pm - Region 6    1:00  -   1:55 pm - Area 2 (Private Schools)
     2:00  -    3:00 pm - RECESS    2:00  -   2:30 pm - Judges’ Deliberation
   3:00  -    3:55 pm - Region 7    2:45 pm - Awards Presentation
   4:00  -    4:55 pm - Region 8    3:00  -   4:00 pm - RECESS
   5:00  -    5:55 pm - Region 1    4:00  -   4:55 pm - Area 3 (Public Schools)
    6:00  -    6:55 pm - Region 2    5:00  -   5:55 pm - Area 4 (Public Schools)
   7:00  -    7:20 pm - Judges’ Deliberation    6:00  -   6:55 pm - Area 1 (Public Schools)
   7:30 pm - Awards Presentation    7:00  -   7:55 pm - Area 2 (Public Schools)
       8:00  -   8:20 pm - Judges’ Deliberation
       8:30 pm - Awards Presentation
 
F. Trophies and individual medals will be awarded to the State Champion and Runner-up schools, and medals will be awarded to the Outstanding Actor and Outstanding Actress.
 
G. Three judges will be selected for each classification in the Region/Area and State competitions.
1. Judges assigned to state competition will have completed the GHSA Adjudication Training Program and will be assigned by Dean Slusser, State Adjudication Director. Region/Areas may contact Dean Slusser at dslusser@camden.k12.ga.us for assistance in selecting judges.
2. The One Act Play Adjudication Director (or the Region Secretary in the case of Region competitions) shall designate a Lead Judge at each competition site.  The site coordinator will bring any concerns about rule interpretation or possible violations to the attention of the Lead Judge for consultation.
3. On the day of the contest, judges shall avoid contact with directors or cast members until after the winners are announced.
4. Judges shall hold all score sheets until after all presentations have been completed.
 
 
SECTION L1
DRAMATIC INTERPRETATION
 
A. Separate contests will be held for boys and girls in Dramatic Interpretation.
 
B. This is a competition involving the communication of prose, poetry, and/or dramatic literature.
1. The selection may be either serious or humorous, but should be of good literary value and appropriate to the contest.
2. The contestants are judged on how well they communicate the author's meaning to the audience.
 (a) The contestant is expected to give the audience a brief introductory statement about the selection(s).
 (b) The material must be memorized and delivered without the use of a manuscript.
 (c) Prompting shall lead to disqualification.
 (d) No costumes, props, music, or sound effects may be used in the presentation.  Area of presentation should be completely vacant.
  NOTE:  Definition of Properties from The Stage and The School, 8th Edition, 1999, page 600:  All the stage furnishings, including furniture and those things brought onstage by the actors; also called props.
 (e) Movement of the speaker is not limited.
 
C. Each contestant is allotted ten (10) minutes for the presentation.
1. The time allotment includes the introduction to the presentation.
2. A penalty of two (2) points will be imposed for each fifteen (15) second period or portions thereof that the contestant is over the time limit.
3. An official timekeeper and time cards will be used in the competition.
 
D. Contestants shall draw for order of presentation upon reporting to the site of the competition.
1. Contestants who are not present at the time of the drawing, will have their position drawn for them.
2. Contestants who are not present at the time designated for their presentation will be disqualified.
3. Contestants who have conflicts with other Literary events should consult with the GHSA prior to the contest, and may have early or late presentation positions designated for them.
 
E. There shall be two (2) judges assigned to this competition at the State level.
1. The following criteria will be considered in the judging:
 (a) selection of material
 (b) communication skills
 (c) vocal technique
 (d) visible technique
2. The judges shall use GHSA scoring sheets and shall follow scoring directions given to them by the GHSA Office.
 
SECTION L2
ESSAY
 
A. Separate contests will be held for boys and girls in Essay in all classifications.
 
B. This is a writing contest in which contestants are provided with topics on which to write.
1. The GHSA Office shall select six (6) topics for the contest.
 (a) Three (3) topics will be selected from current topics discussed in newspapers and magazines.
 (b) Three (3) topics will be selected from literature topics.
2. For the Region Literary competition, the GHSA Office will send the topics to the Region Secretary in a sealed envelope, and that seal will be broken for the first time in the presence of the contestants at the competition site.
3. At the State Literary competition, a new essay shall be written on a new topic.
 
C. Contest Rules:
1. Contestants will compete in a group setting by writing an essay that is not to exceed 600 words on any one of the topics.
2. Two (2) hours will be given for writing the essay.  If a contestant exceeds the time limit, that student will be penalized two (2) points for each 15-second period or portion thereof.
3. The use of dictionary or other reference materials during the competition is prohibited.
4. Essays shall be written in ink.  
 EXCEPTION:  Visually-challenged students will be allowed to use typewriters.
5. Contestants must furnish their paper and pens.
6. The first place winner in each Region competition shall advance to the State competition.
 
D. Judging Criteria:
1. The essays shall be judged on:
 (a) thought development
 (b) order and arrangement
 (c) elements of style
2. Verbal and grammatical correctness, spelling, and punctuation shall have weight, but shall be considered of lesser importance than the interest and general effectiveness of the whole composition.
3. This is a ready writer's contest, and evidence of memorized composition shall weigh heavily against a contestant.
4. Judges shall follow scoring directions provided by the GHSA Office.
 
SECTION L3
EXTEMPORANEOUS SPEAKING
 
A. Separate contests will be held for boys and girls in Extemporaneous Speaking.
 
B. This is a speaking contest in which contestants are provided with a selection of topics dealing with current national and international issues that have been discussed in periodicals since September 1, of the current year that have been complied by the GHSA Office.
1. Contestants will be allowed to use one note card (either 3x5 or 4x6) during the speech.
2. Thirty (30) minutes before the contest is scheduled to begin, the student who is to speak first shall draw three (3) topic cards and select one (1) on which to speak.  The remaining two topics are returned.
3. Contestants will draw for topics at seven (7) minute intervals in the order of presentation.
4. The presiding official of the contest shall record the contestant's name, contestant's school, position for presentation, and topic drawn.
 
C. The procedure for the contest shall be as follows:
1. After each student has drawn a topic, that student will be escorted to a room where he/she will have 30 minutes to prepare a speech in brief, outline form.
2. Students will be disqualified for reading the speech.
3. Contestants may not receive assistance from another person, but may use any paper copy materials that have been brought to the site as well as self-contained computers/laptops (Internet access IS NOT allowed). Contestants may make use of electronic retrieval devices to store and to retrieve subject matter only.
4. Cell phones or smart phones are prohibited from use during the contest period.
5. At the end of the preparation time, the contestant will be escorted to the presentation area.
 (a) The contestant shall give a copy of the selected topic to a judge.
 (b) Failure to speak on the selected topic will result in disqualification.
6. Each contestant shall be allotted seven (7) minutes in which to deliver the speech.  If the time limit is exceeded, the contestant shall be penalized two (2) points for every fifteen (15) second period or portion thereof.
7. Timekeepers must be present and time cards shall be used.
 
D. There shall be two (2) judges for Extemporaneous Speaking at the State competition.
1. The judges shall take into consideration:
 (a) analysis of topic
 (b) organizational skills
 (c) logical support
 (d) language skills
 (e) delivery skills
2. The judges shall use GHSA score sheets and shall follow scoring directions given to them by the GHSA Office.
 
E. Contestants shall draw for order of presentation upon reporting to the site of the competition.
1. Contestants shall report to the drawing area one (1) hour prior to the time set for the contest.
2. Contestants who are not present at the time of the drawing, will have their position drawn for them.
3. Contestants who are not present at the time designated for their presentation will be disqualified.
4. Contestants who have conflicts with other Literary events should consult with the GHSA prior to the contest, and may have early or late presentation positions designated for them.
 
SECTION L4
QUARTET
 
A. Quartet singing is a competition held for boys in all classifications.
1. The singing parts for the members of the quartet are:
 (a) first tenor
 (b) second tenor
 (c) first bass
 (d) second bass
2. Two selections shall be sung from memory.
 (a) Both selections shall be appropriate for a small group of singers.
 (b) One selection must be one of the following:
  (1) chorale
  (2) madrigal
  (3) art song
  (4) folk song
3. The selections may be sung with or without accompaniment.
 (a) Live piano accompaniment is the only form allowed (no tapes allowed).
 (b) Quartets must bring their own accompanist if one is to be used.
4. Each Quartet shall be allotted eight (8) minutes to perform their selections.  If the time limit is exceeded, the Quartet will be penalized two (2) points for every 15 second period or portion thereof that they are overtime.
5. A director/coach is expressly prohibited from “conducting” during any musical contest at the Region or State levels.
6. Audiences will be allowed in the competition room of this event.
7. A substitution will not be allowed in the Quartet advancing to the State Meet after Region competition.
 
B. Contestants shall draw for order of performance upon reporting to the site of the competition at the scheduled time.
1. Contestants who are not present at the time of the drawing, will have their position drawn for them.
2. Contestants who are not present at the time designated for their presentation will be disqualified.
3. Contestants who have conflicts with other Literary events should consult with the GHSA prior to the contest, and may have early or late presentation positions designated for them.
4. At the time of check-in at the competition site, a copy of the music (can be computer generated) will be presented for viewing by the judges. Each school is responsible for meeting copyright laws.
 
C. Judging Procedures:
1. Two judges will be used for the Quartet competition.
 (a) Judges shall not confer with one another during the competition, but they may sit near one another to view the copy of the music.
 (b) Tabulation of score sheets shall be handled independently.
2. Judges shall follow scoring directions provided by the GHSA Office.
3. Judging criteria are as follows:
 (a) Musical Knowledge: Correct text with notes, general sense of time, etc. 20%
 (b) Vocal Technique: Resonance, Diction, Registration, Breathing, Attack
  and release of pitches, Phrases, Freedom of tone, etc. 35%
 (c) Musicianship: Interpretation, Characterization, Style, Stage presence,  
  Sense of rhythmic meter, General communication, Blend with ensemble, etc. 35%
 (d) Other Observations: Work with accompanist, Appropriateness of literature, etc. 10%
 
SECTION L5
SOLO
 
A. Separate contests will be held for boys and girls in vocal Solo.
 
B. Two selections shall be sung from memory:
1. One selection must be from the standard repertory of the art song, oratorio aria, or operatic aria.
2. Both selections must be original compositions, and not arrangements of instructional or choral pieces.
3. The selections may be sung with or without accompaniment.
 (a) Live piano accompaniment is the only form allowed (no tapes allowed).
 (b) Soloists must bring their own accompanist if one is to be used.
4. Each Soloist shall be allotted seven (7) minutes to perform their selections.  If the time limit is exceeded, the Soloist will be penalized two (2) points for every 15 second period or portion thereof that he/she is overtime.
5. A director/coach is expressly prohibited from “conducting” during any musical contest at the Region or State levels.
6. Audiences will be allowed in the competition room of this event.
 
C. Contestants shall draw for order of performance upon reporting to the site of the competition at the scheduled time.
1. Contestants who are not present at the time of the drawing, will have their position drawn for them.
2. Contestants who are not present at the time designated for their presentation will be disqualified.
3. Contestants who have conflicts with other Literary events should consult with the GHSA prior to the contest, and may have early or late presentation positions designated for them.
4. At the time of check-in at the competition site, a copy of the music (can be computer generated) will be presented for viewing by the judges. Each school is responsible for meeting copyright laws.
 
D. Judging Procedures:
1. Two judges will be used for the Solo competition.
 (a) Judges shall not confer with one another during the competition, but they may sit near one another to view the copy of the music.
 (b) Tabulation of score sheets shall be handled independently.
2. Judges shall follow scoring directions provided by the GHSA Office.
3. Judging criteria are as follows:
(a) Musical Knowledge: Correct text with notes, general sense of time, etc. 20%
(b) Vocal Technique: Resonance, Diction, Registration, Breathing, Attack
and release of pitches, Phrases, Freedom of tone, etc. 35%
(c) Musicianship: Interpretation, Characterization, Style, Stage presence,
Sense of rhythmic meter, General communication, Blend with ensemble, etc. 35%
(d) Other Observations: Work with accompanist, Appropriateness of literature, etc. 10%
 
SECTION L6
TRIO
 
A. Trio singing is a competition held for girls in all classifications.
1. The singing parts for the members of the trio are:
(a) first soprano
(b) second soprano
(c) alto
2. Two selections shall be sung from memory.
(a) Both selections shall be appropriate for a small group of singers.
(b) One selection must be one of the following:
(1) chorale
(2) madrigal
(3) art song
(4) folk song
3. The selections may be sung with or without accompaniment.
(a) Live piano accompaniment is the only form allowed (no tapes allowed).
(b) Trios must bring their own accompanist if one is to be used.
4. Each Trio shall be allotted eight (8) minutes to perform their selections.  If the time limit is exceeded, the Trio will be penalized two (2) points for every 15 second period or portion thereof that they are overtime.
5. Choreography will not be considered in the judging of this event.
6. A director/coach is expressly prohibited from “conducting” during any musical contest at the Region or State levels.
7. Audiences will be allowed in the competition room of this event.
8. A substitution will not be allowed in the Trio advancing to the State Meet after Region competition.
 
B. Contestants shall draw for order of performance upon reporting to the site of the competition at the scheduled time.
1. Contestants who are not present at the time of the drawing, will have their position drawn for them.
2. Contestants who are not present at the time designated for their presentation will be disqualified.
3. Contestants who have conflicts with other Literary events should consult with the GHSA prior to the contest, and may have early or late presentation positions designated for them.
4. At the time of check-in at the competition site, a copy of the music (can be computer generated) will be presented for viewing by the judges. Each school is responsible for meeting copyright laws.
 
C. Judging Procedures:
1. Two (two) judges will be used for the Trio competition.
(a) Judges shall not confer with one another during the competition, but they may sit near one another to view the copy of the music.
(b) Tabulation of score sheets shall be handled independently.
2. Judges shall follow scoring directions provided by the GHSA Office.
3. Judging criteria are as follows:
(a) Musical Knowledge: Correct text with notes, general sense of time, etc. 20%
(b) Vocal Technique: Resonance, Diction, Registration, Breathing, Attack
and release of pitches, Phrases, Freedom of tone, etc. 35%
(c) Musicianship: Interpretation, Characterization, Style, Stage presence,
Sense of rhythmic meter, General communication, Blend with ensemble, etc. 35%
(d) Other Observations: Work with accompanist, Appropriateness of literature, etc. 10%
 
END